You are on page 1of 349

OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-Service

Optical Transmission System


V100R003

Configuration Guide

Issue 02
Date 2008-10-15
Part Number 00438451

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1


1 Starting the T2000.......................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000.............................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Starting the Computer............................................................................................................................1-3
1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server......................................................................................................................1-3
1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status.........................................................................................................1-4
1.1.4 Logging in to the T2000 Client..............................................................................................................1-4
1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client...........................................................................................................................1-5
1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server...........................................................................................................1-6
1.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer.................................................................................................................1-6
1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views...............................................................................................................1-7
1.2.1 Opening the Main Topology..................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer.......................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.3 Opening the Clock View........................................................................................................................1-8

2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services.............................................................................................2-1


2.1 Engineering Requirements..............................................................................................................................2-4
2.2 Engineering Planning......................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.2 IP Address Allocation Diagram.............................................................................................................2-6
2.2.3 Board Information of Each NE..............................................................................................................2-7
2.2.4 Fiber/Cable Connection Table...............................................................................................................2-9
2.2.5 Timeslot Allocation Diagram.................................................................................................................2-9
2.2.6 Board Level Protection.........................................................................................................................2-10
2.2.7 Clock Tracing Diagram........................................................................................................................2-11
2.2.8 Orderwire Diagram..............................................................................................................................2-12
2.3 Engineering Preparation................................................................................................................................2-12
2.3.1 NE Side................................................................................................................................................2-12
2.3.2 T2000 Side...........................................................................................................................................2-13
2.3.3 Document.............................................................................................................................................2-13
2.4 Configuration Process...................................................................................................................................2-13
2.5 Logging In to the T2000................................................................................................................................2-14
2.6 Creating a Topology......................................................................................................................................2-15

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Contents Configuration Guide

2.6.1 Creating a Gateway NE: NE1..............................................................................................................2-16


2.6.2 Creating Non-Gateway NEs: NE2–NE5..............................................................................................2-16
2.7 Configuring Communication.........................................................................................................................2-17
2.8 Creating an NE User.....................................................................................................................................2-18
2.9 Logging In to an NE......................................................................................................................................2-20
2.10 Creating a Board..........................................................................................................................................2-21
2.10.1 Adding a Board in the Configuration Wizard....................................................................................2-22
2.10.2 Adding a Board in the NE panel Manually........................................................................................2-23
2.11 Creating Fibers............................................................................................................................................2-24
2.11.1 Creating Fibers Manually...................................................................................................................2-24
2.11.2 Creating Fibers Automatically...........................................................................................................2-25
2.12 Creating a Topology Subnet........................................................................................................................2-26
2.13 Configuring Protection................................................................................................................................2-26
2.13.1 Creating a Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring..................................................................................2-27
2.13.2 Creating a 1+1 Linear MSP Chain.....................................................................................................2-27
2.13.3 Configuring TPS Protection...............................................................................................................2-28
2.14 Configuring the Clock.................................................................................................................................2-29
2.14.1 Configuring the Clock Source Priority Table....................................................................................2-30
2.14.2 Configuring a Clock Subnet...............................................................................................................2-31
2.15 Configuring SDH/PDH Services by Using the Trail Function...................................................................2-32
2.15.1 Creating a VC-4 Server Trail.............................................................................................................2-33
2.15.2 Creating a VC-12 Trail.......................................................................................................................2-34
2.16 Configuring SDH/PDH Services by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function........................................2-36
2.16.1 Creating Services on NE1..................................................................................................................2-37
2.16.2 Creating Services on NE2..................................................................................................................2-39
2.16.3 Creating Services on NE3..................................................................................................................2-40
2.16.4 Creating Services on NE4..................................................................................................................2-41
2.16.5 Creating Services on NE5..................................................................................................................2-43
2.17 Configuring Parameters of SDH/PDH Boards............................................................................................2-44
2.18 Configuring Overhead Bytes.......................................................................................................................2-45
2.18.1 Configuring the RS Overhead J0.......................................................................................................2-45
2.18.2 Configuring the Tracing Byte J1........................................................................................................2-46
2.18.3 Configuring the Signal Flag Byte C2.................................................................................................2-47
2.19 Configuring the Orderwire..........................................................................................................................2-48
2.19.1 Configuring the Orderwire of NE1–NE3...........................................................................................2-48
2.19.2 Configuring the Orderwire of NE4....................................................................................................2-49
2.19.3 Configuring the Orderwire of NE5....................................................................................................2-50
2.20 Enabling/Disabling Performance Monitoring.............................................................................................2-50
2.21 Setting Alarm Parameters............................................................................................................................2-52
2.22 Configuring Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................................................2-53
2.23 Backing Up the NE Configuration Data.....................................................................................................2-54
2.24 Backing Up the T2000 Configuration Data................................................................................................2-55

ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide Contents

2.24.1 Immediate Backup..............................................................................................................................2-55


2.24.2 Periodic Backup.................................................................................................................................2-56

3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes.....................................................3-1


3.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Information of Boards on Each NE.................................................................................................................3-2
3.3 SNCP Ring with Non-Protection Chains........................................................................................................3-4
3.3.1 Configuring a Non-Protection Chain.....................................................................................................3-4
3.3.2 Configuring SNCP Services...................................................................................................................3-5
3.4 SNCP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chains.......................................................................................................3-9
3.4.1 Configuring a 1:1 Linear MSP Subnet...................................................................................................3-9
3.4.2 Configuring SNCP Services.................................................................................................................3-10

4 Configuring Ethernet Services................................................................................................4-1


4.1 Configuring Transparent Transmission EPL Services by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function ..........4-4
4.1.1 Engineering Requirements.....................................................................................................................4-4
4.1.2 Engineering Planning.............................................................................................................................4-5
4.1.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................4-8
4.1.4 Creating a Board.....................................................................................................................................4-8
4.1.5 Configuring the Data of NE1.................................................................................................................4-9
4.1.6 Configuring the Data of NE2...............................................................................................................4-14
4.1.7 Configuring the Data of NE3...............................................................................................................4-15
4.2 Configuring Transparent Transmission EPL Services by Using the Trail Function.....................................4-17
4.2.1 Engineering Requirements...................................................................................................................4-18
4.2.2 Engineering Planning...........................................................................................................................4-18
4.2.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-21
4.2.4 Creating a Trunk Link..........................................................................................................................4-22
4.2.5 Creating an EPL Trail..........................................................................................................................4-24
4.3 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function.........................4-26
4.3.1 Engineering Requirements...................................................................................................................4-27
4.3.2 Engineering Planning...........................................................................................................................4-27
4.3.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-30
4.3.4 Configuring the Data of NE1...............................................................................................................4-31
4.3.5 Configuring the Data of NE2...............................................................................................................4-38
4.3.6 Configuring the Data of NE3...............................................................................................................4-38
4.4 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services by Using the Trail Function.....................................................4-41
4.4.1 Engineering Requirements...................................................................................................................4-42
4.4.2 Engineering Planning...........................................................................................................................4-42
4.4.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-45
4.4.4 Creating a Trunk Link..........................................................................................................................4-46
4.4.5 Creating an EPL Trail..........................................................................................................................4-47
4.5 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function................4-48
4.5.1 Engineering Requirements...................................................................................................................4-49
4.5.2 Engineering Planning...........................................................................................................................4-49

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Contents Configuration Guide

4.5.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-52


4.5.4 Configuring the Data of NE2...............................................................................................................4-53
4.5.5 Configuring the Data of NE3...............................................................................................................4-59
4.6 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services by Using the Trail Function............................................4-59
4.6.1 Engineering Requirements...................................................................................................................4-59
4.6.2 Engineering Planning...........................................................................................................................4-60
4.6.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-63
4.6.4 Creating a Trunk Link..........................................................................................................................4-63
4.6.5 Creating an EPL Trail..........................................................................................................................4-64
4.7 Configuring the Ingress/Egress EVPL Services by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function...................4-65
4.7.1 Engineering Requirements...................................................................................................................4-66
4.7.2 Engineering Planning...........................................................................................................................4-66
4.7.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-70
4.7.4 Configuring the Data of NE1...............................................................................................................4-70
4.7.5 Configuring the Data of NE2...............................................................................................................4-74
4.7.6 Configuring the Data of NE3...............................................................................................................4-74
4.8 Configuring the Transit EVPL Service by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function................................4-74
4.8.1 Engineering Requirements...................................................................................................................4-75
4.8.2 Engineering Planning...........................................................................................................................4-75
4.8.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-79
4.8.4 Configuring the Data of NE1...............................................................................................................4-79
4.8.5 Configuring the Data of NE2...............................................................................................................4-84
4.8.6 Configuring the Data of NE3...............................................................................................................4-86
4.9 Configuring the 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Service by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function.......4-86
4.9.1 Engineering Requirements...................................................................................................................4-86
4.9.2 Engineering Planning...........................................................................................................................4-87
4.9.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-90
4.9.4 Configuring the Data of NE3...............................................................................................................4-91
4.9.5 Configuring the Data of NE2...............................................................................................................4-95
4.9.6 Configuring the Data of NE4...............................................................................................................4-97
4.10 Configuring the 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Service by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function
.............................................................................................................................................................................4-98
4.10.1 Engineering Requirements.................................................................................................................4-98
4.10.2 Engineering Planning.........................................................................................................................4-98
4.10.3 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................4-103
4.10.4 Configuring the Data of NE3...........................................................................................................4-104
4.10.5 Configuring the Data of NE2...........................................................................................................4-109
4.10.6 Configuring the Data of NE4...........................................................................................................4-109
4.11 Configuring the 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Service by Using the Trail Function...........................4-109
4.11.1 Engineering Requirements...............................................................................................................4-109
4.11.2 Engineering Planning.......................................................................................................................4-110
4.11.3 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................4-115
4.11.4 Creating a Trunk Link......................................................................................................................4-115

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide Contents

4.11.5 Creating an EVPLAN Trail..............................................................................................................4-116


4.12 Configuring the MPLS-Based EVPLAN Service by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function............4-117
4.12.1 Engineering Requirements...............................................................................................................4-118
4.12.2 Engineering Planning.......................................................................................................................4-118
4.12.3 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................4-123
4.12.4 Configuring the Data of NE1...........................................................................................................4-124
4.12.5 Configuring the Data of NE2...........................................................................................................4-127
4.12.6 Configuring the Data of NE3...........................................................................................................4-127
4.12.7 Configuring the Data of NE4...........................................................................................................4-127

5 Configuring Auxiliary Services...............................................................................................5-1


5.1 Configuring Broadcast Services......................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 Engineering Requirements.....................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Engineering Planning.............................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................5-3
5.2 Configuring F1 Data Services.........................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1 Engineering Requirements.....................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 Engineering Planning.............................................................................................................................5-5
5.2.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................5-5

6 Configuring the DCN................................................................................................................6-1


6.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.1 Background for the Generation of the DCN..........................................................................................6-3
6.1.2 DCN Solutions.......................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2 HWECC Communication................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.1 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-5
6.3 Configuring HWECC Communication...........................................................................................................6-6
6.3.1 Creating a Gateway NE..........................................................................................................................6-7
6.3.2 Creating a Non-Gateway NE..................................................................................................................6-7
6.3.3 Setting the NE ID...................................................................................................................................6-7
6.3.4 Configuring the Extended ECC..............................................................................................................6-8
6.3.5 Querying the ECC Route......................................................................................................................6-10
6.3.6 Configuring the DCC Rate...................................................................................................................6-10
6.3.7 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission......................................................................................6-12
6.4 IP over DCC..................................................................................................................................................6-14
6.4.1 Basic Concepts.....................................................................................................................................6-14
6.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-15
6.4.3 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-15
6.4.4 Configuration Requirements................................................................................................................6-18
6.5 Configuring IP over DCC Communication...................................................................................................6-19
6.5.1 Creating a Gateway NE........................................................................................................................6-19
6.5.2 Setting NE Communication Parameters...............................................................................................6-19
6.5.3 Configuring Static Routes....................................................................................................................6-20

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Contents Configuration Guide

6.5.4 Allocating DCC Resources..................................................................................................................6-21


6.5.5 Querying Communication Status.........................................................................................................6-22
6.5.6 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status.....................................................................................................6-22
6.6 OSI over DCC...............................................................................................................................................6-22
6.6.1 Basic Concepts.....................................................................................................................................6-23
6.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-24
6.6.3 Application...........................................................................................................................................6-24
6.7 Configuring the OSI over DCC Communication..........................................................................................6-26
6.7.1 Creating a Gateway NE........................................................................................................................6-27
6.7.2 Setting the NE ID.................................................................................................................................6-27
6.7.3 Setting NE Communication Parameter................................................................................................6-27
6.7.4 Setting the NSAP Address for an NE...................................................................................................6-28
6.7.5 Configuring the Node Type for an NE.................................................................................................6-30
6.7.6 Configuring Optical Port Protocol Stake and LAPD Role...................................................................6-31
6.7.7 Querying Route Information................................................................................................................6-33
6.7.8 Creating an OSI GNE...........................................................................................................................6-33

7 Configuring the STP or RSTP..................................................................................................7-1


7.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Background for the Generation of the STP or RSTP.............................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Basic Knowledge about the STP or RSTP ............................................................................................7-2
7.1.3 STP/RSTP Port State Transition............................................................................................................7-3
7.2 Engineering Requirements..............................................................................................................................7-4
7.3 Engineering Planning......................................................................................................................................7-4
7.3.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................7-4
7.3.2 Board Information of Each NE.............................................................................................................. 7-5
7.3.3 Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE..........................................................................................7-5
7.4 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................................7-8
7.4.1 Creating a Board.....................................................................................................................................7-9
7.4.2 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of NE1................................................................................................7-10
7.4.3 Configuring the Bound Paths of NE1..................................................................................................7-12
7.4.4 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service of NE1.........................................................................................7-12
7.4.5 Configuring the VLAN Forwarding Filtering Table............................................................................7-13
7.4.6 Configuring Cross-Connections from Ethernet boards to SDH Line Boards on NE1.........................7-14
7.4.7 Configuring the Data of NE2 and NE3................................................................................................7-15
7.4.8 Configuring the STP/RSTP..................................................................................................................7-15
7.4.9 Querying STP/RSTP Running Information.........................................................................................7-18

8 Configuring ETH-OAM............................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2 Engineering Requirements..............................................................................................................................8-3
8.3 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................................8-5
8.4 Creating MPs...................................................................................................................................................8-5
8.5 Activating the CC............................................................................................................................................8-6

vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide Contents

8.6 Enabling the LB..............................................................................................................................................8-7


8.7 Starting the LT................................................................................................................................................8-8

9 Configuring the LPT..................................................................................................................9-1


9.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.1 Application of the P2P LPT...................................................................................................................9-2
9.2.2 Application of the P2MP LPT................................................................................................................9-4
9.3 Configuring the Point-to-Point LPT Function................................................................................................9-8
9.4 Configuring the P2MP LPT Function...........................................................................................................9-10

10 Configuring the PRBS...........................................................................................................10-1


10.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 PRBS Function...................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Boards with the PRBS Function.........................................................................................................10-2
10.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.3 Lower Order PRBS Function......................................................................................................................10-3

11 Configuring the Ethernet Test Frame.................................................................................11-1


11.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.3 Configuring the Ethernet Test Frame..........................................................................................................11-3

12 Configuring the LCAS..........................................................................................................12-1


12.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................12-2
12.2 Application..................................................................................................................................................12-2
12.3 Configuring the LCAS................................................................................................................................12-4

13 Configuring Transmux..........................................................................................................13-1
13.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.2 Functions and Features................................................................................................................................13-2
13.3 Application..................................................................................................................................................13-3
13.4 Configuring the Working Mode of a Board................................................................................................13-5
13.5 Configuring the Transmux Mode................................................................................................................13-6
13.6 Configuring the Transmux Server Mode ...................................................................................................13-8

A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1
B Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................B-1
Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide Figures

Figures

Figure 2-1 Geographic position of each node and available optical fiber cables.................................................2-4
Figure 2-2 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-3 IP address allocation diagram.............................................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-4 Board layout of NE1...........................................................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-5 Board layout of NE2 and NE3............................................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-6 Board layout of NE4...........................................................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-7 Board layout of NE5...........................................................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-8 Timeslot allocation diagram.............................................................................................................2-10
Figure 2-9 Clock tracing diagram......................................................................................................................2-11
Figure 2-10 Orderwire diagram..........................................................................................................................2-12
Figure 3-1 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Timeslot allocation diagram...............................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-3 Board layout of NE1...........................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-4 Board layout of NE2 and NE3............................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-5 Board layout of NE4...........................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-6 Board layout of NE5...........................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 4-1 Ethernet service networking and port allocation................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-2 Board layout of NE1...........................................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-3 Board layout of NE3...........................................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-4 Service configuration diagram............................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-5 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services ...................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-6 Ethernet service networking and port allocation..............................................................................4-19
Figure 4-7 Board layout of NE1.........................................................................................................................4-19
Figure 4-8 Board layout of NE3.........................................................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-9 Service configuration diagram..........................................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-10 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services ...............................................................................4-21
Figure 4-11 Ethernet service networking and port allocation............................................................................4-28
Figure 4-12 Board layout of NE1.......................................................................................................................4-28
Figure 4-13 Board layout of NE3.......................................................................................................................4-29
Figure 4-14 Service configuration diagram........................................................................................................4-29
Figure 4-15 SDH timeslot allocation diagram...................................................................................................4-30
Figure 4-16 Ethernet service networking and port allocation............................................................................4-43
Figure 4-17 Board layout of NE1.......................................................................................................................4-43

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Figures Configuration Guide

Figure 4-18 Board layout of NE3.......................................................................................................................4-44


Figure 4-19 Service configuration diagram........................................................................................................4-44
Figure 4-20 SDH timeslot allocation diagram...................................................................................................4-45
Figure 4-21 Ethernet service networking and port allocation............................................................................4-50
Figure 4-22 Board layout of NE2.......................................................................................................................4-50
Figure 4-23 Board layout of NE3.......................................................................................................................4-51
Figure 4-24 Service configuration diagram........................................................................................................4-51
Figure 4-25 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services................................................................................4-52
Figure 4-26 Ethernet service networking and port allocation............................................................................4-60
Figure 4-27 Board layout of NE2.......................................................................................................................4-61
Figure 4-28 Board layout of NE3.......................................................................................................................4-61
Figure 4-29 Service configuration diagram........................................................................................................4-61
Figure 4-30 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services................................................................................4-63
Figure 4-31 Ethernet service networking and port allocation............................................................................4-67
Figure 4-32 Board layout of NE1.......................................................................................................................4-67
Figure 4-33 Board layout of NE3.......................................................................................................................4-68
Figure 4-34 Service configuration diagram........................................................................................................4-68
Figure 4-35 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services................................................................................4-69
Figure 4-36 Ethernet service networking and port allocation............................................................................4-76
Figure 4-37 Board layout of NE1.......................................................................................................................4-76
Figure 4-38 Board layout of NE2 and NE3........................................................................................................4-77
Figure 4-39 Service configuration diagram........................................................................................................4-77
Figure 4-40 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services................................................................................4-79
Figure 4-41 Ethernet service networking and port allocation............................................................................4-87
Figure 4-42 Board layout of NE2 and NE3........................................................................................................4-88
Figure 4-43 Board layout of NE4.......................................................................................................................4-88
Figure 4-44 Service configuration diagram........................................................................................................4-88
Figure 4-45 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services................................................................................4-90
Figure 4-46 Ethernet service networking and port allocation............................................................................4-99
Figure 4-47 Board layout of NE 2 and NE3.......................................................................................................4-99
Figure 4-48 Board layout of NE4.....................................................................................................................4-100
Figure 4-49 Service configuration diagram......................................................................................................4-100
Figure 4-50 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services..............................................................................4-103
Figure 4-51 Ethernet service networking and port allocation..........................................................................4-110
Figure 4-52 Board layout of NE 2 and NE3.....................................................................................................4-111
Figure 4-53 Board layout of NE4.....................................................................................................................4-111
Figure 4-54 Service configuration diagram......................................................................................................4-112
Figure 4-55 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services..............................................................................4-115
Figure 4-56 Ethernet service networking and port allocation..........................................................................4-118
Figure 4-57 Board layout of NE1.....................................................................................................................4-119
Figure 4-58 Board layout of NE2 and NE3......................................................................................................4-119
Figure 4-59 Service configuration ...................................................................................................................4-120

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide Figures

Figure 4-60 NE Service Configuration Diagram..............................................................................................4-120


Figure 4-61 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services..............................................................................4-123
Figure 6-1 Positions of the D bytes in the SDH overhead................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-2 Networking that involves only Huawei equipment............................................................................6-5
Figure 6-3 Networking that involves Huawei equipment and third-party equipment..........................................6-6
Figure 6-4 Application Ι.....................................................................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-5 Application II....................................................................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-6 Application III..................................................................................................................................6-17
Figure 6-7 Application IV..................................................................................................................................6-18
Figure 6-8 Format of a simple NSAP address....................................................................................................6-23
Figure 6-9 Format of a complicated NSAP address...........................................................................................6-23
Figure 6-10 Huawei equipment at the edge of the network...............................................................................6-25
Figure 6-11 Huawei equipment at the core of the network................................................................................6-26
Figure 7-1 STP port state transition..................................................................................................................... 7-3
Figure 7-2 Ethernet service networking and port allocation................................................................................7-5
Figure 7-3 Board layout of NE1, NE2, and NE3................................................................................................. 7-5
Figure 7-4 Service configuration diagram............................................................................................................7-6
Figure 8-1 Application example of the maintenance point..................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-2 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-3 Board layout of NE1...........................................................................................................................8-4
Figure 10-1 Signal flow for the lower order PRBS test.....................................................................................10-3
Figure 10-2 Lower order PRBS test in the tributary direction...........................................................................10-3
Figure 11-1 Application of the test frame..........................................................................................................11-3
Figure 12-1 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment by using the LCAS.....................................................................12-3
Figure 12-2 Virtual concatenation group protection realized by using the LCAS.............................................12-3
Figure 13-1 E1 Transmux...................................................................................................................................13-4
Figure 13-2 E1 Transmux Server.......................................................................................................................13-4
Figure 13-3 Networking diagram in the Transmux Server mode.......................................................................13-9

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide Tables

Tables

Table 2-1 Service requirements among the nodes................................................................................................2-4


Table 2-2 Mapping relation between the place codes and the NEs......................................................................2-6
Table 2-3 Fiber/Cable connection between the NEs............................................................................................2-9
Table 2-4 Board level protection information....................................................................................................2-11
Table 2-5 Procedures for configuring SDH/PDH services.................................................................................2-13
Table 2-6 NE user level and authority description.............................................................................................2-18
Table 2-7 NE user flag........................................................................................................................................2-19
Table 2-8 Parameters for configuring the ALS..................................................................................................2-54
Table 3-1 Fiber/Cable connection between NE4 and NE5...................................................................................3-9
Table 4-1 Mapping relation between Ethernet boards and Ethernet services......................................................4-1
Table 4-2 Ethernet service connection.................................................................................................................4-7
Table 4-3 Process of point-to-point transparent transmission EPL service configuration...................................4-8
Table 4-4 Parameters of basic attributes.............................................................................................................4-12
Table 4-5 Parameters for configuring the bound paths......................................................................................4-13
Table 4-6 Ethernet service connection...............................................................................................................4-20
Table 4-7 Process of configuring point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services (by trail)...................4-22
Table 4-8 Parameters for creating a trunk link...................................................................................................4-24
Table 4-9 Parameters for creating an EPL trail..................................................................................................4-26
Table 4-10 Ethernet service connection.............................................................................................................4-29
Table 4-11 Process of configuring the PORT-shared EPL service....................................................................4-31
Table 4-12 Parameters for tag attributes.............................................................................................................4-36
Table 4-13 Parameters for configuring the EPL service (by station).................................................................4-37
Table 4-14 Ethernet service connection.............................................................................................................4-44
Table 4-15 Process of configuring the PORT-shared EVPL services by using the trail function......................4-46
Table 4-16 Ethernet service connection.............................................................................................................4-51
Table 4-17 Flow for configuring the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service...........................................................4-53
Table 4-18 CAR parameters...............................................................................................................................4-58
Table 4-19 Flow configuration parameters........................................................................................................4-58
Table 4-20 Ethernet service connection.............................................................................................................4-62
Table 4-21 Flow of configuring the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service (by trail).............................................4-63
Table 4-22 Ethernet service connection.............................................................................................................4-68
Table 4-23 Process of configuring the ingress/egress service............................................................................4-70
Table 4-24 Ethernet service connection.............................................................................................................4-77

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Tables Configuration Guide

Table 4-25 Process of configuring the transit EVPL service.............................................................................4-79


Table 4-26 Ethernet service connection............................................................................................................. 4-89
Table 4-27 Process of configuring the EPLAN service..................................................................................... 4-90
Table 4-28 Parameters for configuring the Ethernet LAN service.....................................................................4-93
Table 4-29 Connection relation of the Ethernet service of company F............................................................4-101
Table 4-30 Connection relation of the Ethernet service of company G...........................................................4-101
Table 4-31 VLAN filtering table......................................................................................................................4-102
Table 4-32 Process of configuring the EVPLAN service.................................................................................4-104
Table 4-33 Parameters for configuring the VLAN filtering table....................................................................4-108
Table 4-34 Connection relation of the Ethernet service of company F............................................................4-112
Table 4-35 Connection relation of the Ethernet service of company G...........................................................4-113
Table 4-36 VLAN filtering table......................................................................................................................4-114
Table 4-37 Process of configuring the EPLAN service by using the trail function.........................................4-115
Table 4-38 Ethernet service connection...........................................................................................................4-121
Table 4-39 VLAN filtering table......................................................................................................................4-122
Table 4-40 Process of configuring the EVPLAN service.................................................................................4-123
Table 5-1 NE parameters......................................................................................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 NE parameters......................................................................................................................................5-5
Table 6-1 NE attributes.........................................................................................................................................6-8
Table 6-2 Parameters for configuring the extended ECC.....................................................................................6-9
Table 6-3 DCC channel modes of the OptiX OSN 2000................................................................................... 6-11
Table 6-4 Parameters for configuring the DCC rate...........................................................................................6-12
Table 6-5 Parameters for configuring the DCC transparent transmission..........................................................6-13
Table 6-6 Communication parameters............................................................................................................... 6-20
Table 6-7 Parameters for configuring the GNE attributes..................................................................................6-29
Table 6-8 Network-layer parameters..................................................................................................................6-31
Table 6-9 Parameters for setting the optical port protocol and LAPD role........................................................6-32
Table 7-1 Ethernet service connection table 1......................................................................................................7-6
Table 7-2 Ethernet service connection table 2......................................................................................................7-7
Table 7-3 Forwarding filtering table....................................................................................................................7-8
Table 7-4 Bridge priority table.............................................................................................................................7-8
Table 7-5 Process of configuring the STP/RSTP.................................................................................................7-8
Table 7-6 Parameters for setting the basic attributes of Ethernet ports..............................................................7-11
Table 7-7 Point-to-point attributes..................................................................................................................... 7-11
Table 7-8 Parameters for configuring the Ethernet LAN service.......................................................................7-13
Table 7-9 Bridge parameters.............................................................................................................................. 7-17
Table 7-10 Parameter description.......................................................................................................................7-17
Table 7-11 Status of the internal ports ...............................................................................................................7-19
Table 8-1 Fiber/Cable connection table................................................................................................................8-4
Table 8-2 Process of configuring the ETH-OAM................................................................................................8-5
Table 8-3 Recommended average CC period.......................................................................................................8-7
Table 9-1 Parameters for the P2P LPT.................................................................................................................9-9

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide Tables

Table 9-2 Parameters for the P2MP LPT........................................................................................................... 9-11


Table 10-1 Parameters of lower order PRBS configuration...............................................................................10-5
Table 11-1 Parameters of the test frame.............................................................................................................11-4
Table 12-1 LCAS parameters.............................................................................................................................12-5
Table 13-1 Working mode of the PLM..............................................................................................................13-2
Table 13-2 Parameters for configuring the service mode...................................................................................13-6
Table 13-3 PLM in the MUX mode...................................................................................................................13-7
Table 13-4 Service requirements in the MUX mode..........................................................................................13-7
Table 13-5 PLM in the Transmux Server mode.................................................................................................13-8
Table 13-6 Service requirements in the Transmux Server mode.......................................................................13-9
Table 13-7 Services configured in the Transmux Server mode.........................................................................13-9

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document provides an overview of the configuration, describes the engineering
requirements, engineering planning, and configuration process.

This document describes how to configure services, such as SDH services and Ethernet services
on the T2000.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 2000 V100R003

OptiX iManager T2000 V200R007C01

Intended Audience
This document is intended for the following audience:

l Data configuration engineers


l System maintenance engineers
l Installation and commissioning engineers

Organization
The following table lists the contents of this document.

Chapter Description

1 Starting the T2000 Describes the basic operations to the quick start of the
T2000.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
About This Document Configuration Guide

Chapter Description

2 Configuring SDH/PDH Describes how to configure NEs, boards, cables/fibers,


Services protection subnet, SDH services, clock, and orderwire on
the T2000.

3 Configuring Services in Describes the service configuration methods in various


Different Protection Schemes protection schemes.

4 Configuring Ethernet Describes how to configure EPL, EVPL, EPLAN, and


Services EVPLAN services by using the per-NE configuration
function or the trail function on the T2000.

5 Configuring Auxiliary Describes how to configure broadcast data services and F1


Services interface services on the T2000.

6 Configuring the DCN Describes how to configure the data communication


network (DCN) on the T2000.

7 Configuring the STP or Describes how to configure the spanning tree protocol
RSTP (STP) and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSPT) on the
T2000.

8 Configuring ETH-OAM Describes how to configure the operation, administration,


and management (OAM) feature on the T2000.

9 Configuring the LPT Describes how to configure the LPT feature on the T2000.

10 Configuring the PRBS Describes how to configure the pseudorandom binary


sequence (PRBS) function on the T2000.

11 Configuring the Ethernet Describes how to configure the Ethernet test frames on the
Test Frame T2000.

12 Configuring the LCAS Describes how to configure the link capacity adjustment
scheme (LCAS) feature on the T2000.

13 Configuring Transmux Describes how to configure the Transmux feature on the


T2000.

A Glossary Lists the terms used in this document.

B Acronyms and Lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this document.
Abbreviations

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following table describes the symbols that are used in this document.

2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not


prevented, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which


if not prevented, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not


prevented, could result in damage to the equipment, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement


important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.


Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
About This Document Configuration Guide

Convention Description

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide About This Document

Action Description

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


The updated contents are as follows.
This version fixes some known defects.

Updates in Issue 01 (2008-08-30)


Initial field trial release.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 1 Starting the T2000

1 Starting the T2000

About This Chapter

The following section describes certain preparation operations that ensure a smooth and trouble-
free launch of the T2000.

1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000


The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. Therefore, it is
recommended that you comply with the following procedures when starting or shutting down
the T2000 so that other users who are operating on the T2000 are not affected.
1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views
The T2000 common views include Main Topology, Trail View, Clock View, and NE Explorer.
You can use these views to manage the topology, equipment, trail, and clock.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
1 Starting the T2000 Configuration Guide

1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000


The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. Therefore, it is
recommended that you comply with the following procedures when starting or shutting down
the T2000 so that other users who are operating on the T2000 are not affected.

Context
l To start the computer and the T2000 application, do as follows:
1. Start the computer.
2. Start the T2000 server.
3. Start the T2000 client.
l To shut down the T2000 application and the computer, do as follows:
1. Exit the T2000 client.
2. Stop the T2000 server.
3. Shut down the computer.
1.1.1 Starting the Computer
To prevent damage to the computer or data loss, refer to the procedure provided to start the
computer. The startup procedures of the workstation are different from the startup procedures
of a normal PC. Follow the procedure correctly to perform the required operations.
1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server
After starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then, you can log in to the
T2000 to manage the network.
1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status
When you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client, you can use the
System Monitor to view the T2000 process status to determine whether the server is faulty.
1.1.4 Logging in to the T2000 Client
You can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to the
T2000 client.
1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client
Before restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server, you must exit the
T2000 client.
1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server
When the T2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. In
special situations, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where the
T2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor Client to shut
down the T2000 server.
1.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer
Generally, the computer is not shut down. In special situations, for example, if the computer
becomes faulty, shut down the computer by following the correct sequence. The shutdown
procedures of the workstation are different from the shutdown procedures of a normal PC. Follow
the procedure correctly to perform the required operations.

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 1 Starting the T2000

1.1.1 Starting the Computer


To prevent damage to the computer or data loss, refer to the procedure provided to start the
computer. The startup procedures of the workstation are different from the startup procedures
of a normal PC. Follow the procedure correctly to perform the required operations.

Prerequisite
l The T2000 must be installed correctly.
l The power cable of the workstation or of the computer, the power cable of the monitor, the
data line, and the Ethernet line must be connected correctly.
l If there is a printer, modem, or other peripherals, their power line and data line must be
connected correctly.

Background Information
The T2000 can run on the UNIX or Windows operating system. The functions are the same on
each operating system. For more information about the recommended hardware configuration,
see the OptiX iManager T2000 Product Description.

Procedure
l On UNIX
1. Power on the printer, modem, and other peripherals.
2. Power on the workstation. The Solaris starts automatically and the Prompt dialog box
is displayed.
3. Enter the Username and Password in the Login dialog box. For example, User:
t2000 (by default); Password: t2000 (by default).
4. Click OK to open the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) window.
l On Windows
1. Power on the printer, modem, and other peripherals.
2. Power on the computer. The Windows starts automatically.
3. Enter the Username and Password in the Login dialog box. For example, User:
t2000 (by default); Password: t2000 (by default).
4. Click OK to open the Windows user interface.
----End

1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server


After starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then, you can log in to the
T2000 to manage the network.

Prerequisite
l The computer where the T2000 is installed must be started correctly.
l The operating system of the T2000 server must be running correctly.
l The T2000 license must be in the server directory.
l The SQL server must be started and must work normally.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
1 Starting the T2000 Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the T2000Server icon on the desktop of the T2000 server.
Step 2 In the Login dialog box, enter User Name, Password and Server. For example, User Name:
admin, Password: T2000 (T2000 is the default password of the admin user.), and Server:
Local.
NOTE

Periodically change the password and keep it safely.

Step 3 Click Login to display the System Monitor window. Wait until the core processes (including
Ems Server, Schedulesrv Server, Security Server, Syslog Agent, Topo Server, WebLCT
Server, Tomcat Service, Client Upgrader, and Toolkit Server) and Database Server
Process are in the Running state. Now the T2000 server is started successfully.
Step 4 Optional: When required, you can also start the Northbound Interface processes (including
Northbound Interface Module(iPASSAgent) Process, Northbound Interface Module
(SNMP) Process, Naming Service, Notify Service, and itnotify) manually.
Step 5 Optional: If the System Monitor is started, you need to use it to restart the T2000 server when
required. Choose System > Start Server from the Main Menu of the System Monitor. When
the core processes and Database Server Process processes are in the Running state, the T2000
server is started properly.

----End

1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status


When you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client, you can use the
System Monitor to view the T2000 process status to determine whether the server is faulty.

Background Information
To view the status of the T2000 processes by using UNIX command line, run the following
command:
# /T2000/server/bin/showt2000server
If each process that is entered has a corresponding process ID and the specific ID does not change,
the T2000 processes are normal.

Procedure
In the System Monitor, click the Process tab. View the status of the T2000 core processes
(including Ems Server, Schedulesrv Server, Security Server, Syslog Agent, Topo Server,
WebLCT Server, Tomcat Service, Client Upgrader, and Toolkit Server), Database Server
Process, and Northbound Interface processes (including Northbound Interface Module
(iPASSAgent) Process, Northbound Interface Module(SNMP) Process, Naming Service,
Notify Service, and itnotify). If all the processes are in the Running state, the T2000 process
is normal.
----End

1.1.4 Logging in to the T2000 Client


You can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to the
T2000 client.

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 1 Starting the T2000

Prerequisite
The T2000 server must be started correctly.

Procedure
Step 1 On the computer of the T2000 client, double-click the T2000 Client icon on the desktop.

Step 2 Enter the User Name and Password of the T2000 client. For example, User Name: admin;
Password: T2000.
NOTE

l By default, the initial user name is admin, and the password is T2000. To protect the T2000 from
unauthorized logins, you need to immediately change this password.
l The administrator needs to create new T2000 users and assign them to certain authority groups.

Step 3 Optional: Set the server parameters.

1. Click to display the Setting dialog box.


2. Click New to display another Setting dialog box.
3. In the Setting dialog box, specify the IP Address, Mode, and Server Name.
NOTE

l The IP address is the IP address used by the T2000 server.


l The Mode has two options including Common and Security (SSL). When you select the
Security (SSL) mode, the communication between the client and the server is encrypted.
l The communication mode of the client must be consistent with the communication mode of the
server. Otherwise, the client cannot log in to the server. To view the communication mode of the
server, choose System > Communication Security Setting from the Main Menu of the System
Monitor client.
l You need not enter the Port number. After the Mode is specified, the system selects a Port
number automatically.
4. Click OK to complete the process of adding a server.
5. Click OK to complete the server settings.

Step 4 Select a server and click Login to access the T2000.

----End

1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client


Before restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server, you must exit the
T2000 client.

Prerequisite
The T2000 client must be started normally.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
1 Starting the T2000 Configuration Guide

NOTE

If the layout of the view is changed and not saved, a Confirm dialog box is displayed, prompting you to
save the changes. After you click OK in the dialog box, you can automatically exit the client.

----End

1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server


When the T2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. In
special situations, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where the
T2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor Client to shut
down the T2000 server.

Prerequisite
All the T2000 clients connected to the T2000 server must be shut down.

Context
When performing the operations related to the database (such as initializing the T2000
database, restoring T2000 databases, and restoring T2000 MO data) or when performing the
operations related to the T2000 (such as the upgrade, installing patches, and re-installing the
T2000), you need to shut down the T2000 server first. It is recommended that you shut down
the T2000 server in the same way as you shut down the T2000 server and the System Monitor
Client.

Procedure
l Shut down the T2000 server and the System Monitor.
NOTE

After shutting down the T2000 server and the System Monitor, you can perform the operations related
to the database (such as initializing the T2000 database, restoring T2000 databases, and restoring
T2000 MO data) or can perform the operations related to the T2000 (such as the upgrade, installing
patches, and re-installing the T2000).
1. In the System Monitor, choose System > Shutdown System from the Main Menu.
l Shut down the T2000 server only.
NOTE

After shutdown, you cannot perform the operations related to the database (such as initializing the
T2000 database, restoring T2000 databases, and restoring T2000 MO data) or you cannot perform
the operations related to the T2000 (such as the upgrade, installing patches, and re-installing the
T2000).
1. In the System Monitor, choose System > Stop Server from the Main Menu.
2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. When all the processes are in the
Stopped status, the T2000 server is stopped normally.
----End

1.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer


Generally, the computer is not shut down. In special situations, for example, if the computer
becomes faulty, shut down the computer by following the correct sequence. The shutdown
procedures of the workstation are different from the shutdown procedures of a normal PC. Follow
the procedure correctly to perform the required operations.

1-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 1 Starting the T2000

Prerequisite
The T2000 server and client applications must be stopped.

Precaution

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the equipment or data loss, perform the following steps one by one to shut
down the workstation.

Procedure
l On UNIX platform
1. Enter the following commands in the terminal window, and the UNIX workstation
shuts down automatically:
% su root
Password: rootkit
# sync;sync;sync;sync;sync
# shutdown -y -g0 -i5

NOTE

l rootkit is the default password of super user root. If the password is changed, enter the
new password.
l To restart the Sun workstation, the last command should be # shutdown -y -g0 -i6.
2. Switch off the monitor and the peripheral equipment.
l On Windows platform
1. Choose Start > Shut down from the Windows desktop.
2. Choose Shut down and click OK in the dialog box. The computer shuts down
automatically.
3. Switch off the monitor and the peripheral equipment.

----End

1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views


The T2000 common views include Main Topology, Trail View, Clock View, and NE Explorer.
You can use these views to manage the topology, equipment, trail, and clock.

1.2.1 Opening the Main Topology


After opening the Main Topology, you can manage the network topology. For example, you can
create a topology object and a subnet, and lock the position of an NE icon on the topology.
1.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer
The NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. After opening
the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage, and maintain each NE, board, or port in a
hierarchical manner.
1.2.3 Opening the Clock View

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
1 Starting the T2000 Configuration Guide

After opening the Clock View, you can set an NE clock, query a network clock synchronization
status, or trace a clock.

1.2.1 Opening the Main Topology


After opening the Main Topology, you can manage the network topology. For example, you can
create a topology object and a subnet, and lock the position of an NE icon on the topology.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure
l To open the Main Topology, log in to the T2000.
l Choose Window > Main Topology from the Main Menu.

----End

1.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer


The NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. After opening
the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage, and maintain each NE, board, or port in a
hierarchical manner.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network monitor" authority or higher.

Background Information
You can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.

Procedure
Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.

----End

1.2.3 Opening the Clock View


After opening the Clock View, you can set an NE clock, query a network clock synchronization
status, or trace a clock.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure
Choose Configuration > Clock View from the Main Menu.

----End

1-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

About This Chapter

This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the SDH/PDH services on the T2000.
It also describes the related engineering requirements and engineering information. You can
learn how to configure SDH/PDH services and other similar services through this example.

NOTE

The screen shots contained in this manual vary with the T2000 version and NE software version. If the
versions mismatch, the screen shots may be different from the actual version.
The OptiX iManager T2000 version is V200R007C01.
The OptiX iManager T2000 is referred to as T2000 hereinafter.

2.1 Engineering Requirements


In a city, new communication lines need to be constructed among nodes A, B, C, D, and E to
form a local network.
2.2 Engineering Planning
Based on the requirements, the engineering design department conducts planning and outputs
the detailed engineering information.
2.3 Engineering Preparation
Check the following items before configuring services on the T2000.
2.4 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure SDH/PDH services.
2.5 Logging In to the T2000
The T2000 provides all the NE-layer management functions, including the fault management,
performance management, configuration management, security management, communication
management, topology management, and system management. In addition, the T2000 provides
certain network-layer management functions. This topic describes how to log in to the T2000.
2.6 Creating a Topology
This topic describes how to create, display, and manage an NE on the T2000.
2.7 Configuring Communication
This topic describes how to set the Ethernet access function of an NE on the T2000. By default,
an NE supports access of the T2000 through Ethernet.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

2.8 Creating an NE User


This topic describes how to create an NE user on the T2000. The NE user can specify the authority
of the NE operator, thus facilitating the control of the NE access and configuration.
2.9 Logging In to an NE
This topic describes how to switch the NE users on the T2000. Different clients cannot use the
same NE user ID to log in to or manage an NE. Otherwise, the client automatically logs out of
the NE when another client logs in to the NE.
2.10 Creating a Board
This topic describes how to create a board in the configuration wizard or the NE panel diagram.
Before you configure services on an NE and to manage an NE, create the boards.
2.11 Creating Fibers
This topic describes how to create fibers on the T2000. After fibers are created, they are displayed
on the T2000.
2.12 Creating a Topology Subnet
This topic describes how to create a topology subnet on the T2000 and how to include the created
NEs into the topology subnet. A topology subnet is created to simplify the GUI and has no impact
on the running NEs. To facilitate management, the topology objects in the same network area
or with similar attributes are displayed in one subnet.
2.13 Configuring Protection
This topic describes how to create a protection subnet and TPS protection group, for example,
a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a 1+1 protection chain. The protection subnet provides
a network level protection for the services of each NE on the protection subnet. The TPS
protection provides the board level protection for the services.
2.14 Configuring the Clock
This topic describes how to configure a clock on the T2000. After you set the clock source and
specify the clock priority level, You need to enable the SSM or extended SSM protocol to prevent
the NE from tracing the incorrect clock source, thus providing protection. For the clock.
2.15 Configuring SDH/PDH Services by Using the Trail Function
This topic describes how to configure SDH/PDH services and the server layer trail by using the
trail function on the T2000. The trail function provides end-to-end service configuration between
NEs.
2.16 Configuring SDH/PDH Services by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function
This topic describes how to configure SDH/PDH services by using the per-NE configuration
function.
2.17 Configuring Parameters of SDH/PDH Boards
Common SDH board parameters include Laser Switch, Optical Interface Loopback, and
VC-4 Loopback. Common PDH board parameters include Service Load Indication and
Tributary Loopback.
2.18 Configuring Overhead Bytes
This topic describes how to configure overhead bytes on the T2000. You can set the overhead
bytes for maintaining or monitoring trails.
2.19 Configuring the Orderwire
This topic describes how to configure the orderwire on the T2000. If the NE is provisioned with
an orderwire, the network maintenance personnel can use the orderwire as a private
communication channel during emergencies.
2.20 Enabling/Disabling Performance Monitoring

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

This topic describes how to enable or disable the performance monitoring function on the T2000.
The performance parameters are used to monitor the equipment and analyze the network. This
topic describes how to enable or disable the performance monitoring function on the T2000.
2.21 Setting Alarm Parameters
This topic describes how to set the alarm parameters on the T2000. To prevent the alarm data
from overflowing or to prevent damage to the alarm data, you need to dump the alarm data in
time.
2.22 Configuring Automatic Laser Shutdown
The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) is performed before the output power of the laser
transmitter and the optical amplifier reaches a dangerous level. This topic considers the XCS4A
as an example to describe how to configure the ALS.
2.23 Backing Up the NE Configuration Data
This topic describes how to back up the NE configuration data on the T2000. To prevent data
loss, back up the NE configuration data after the configuration is complete.
2.24 Backing Up the T2000 Configuration Data
To prevent data loss, back up the T2000 configuration data after the configuration is complete.
This topic describes the immediate data backup and the periodic data backup on the T2000.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

2.1 Engineering Requirements


In a city, new communication lines need to be constructed among nodes A, B, C, D, and E to
form a local network.

Table 2-1 lists the requirements for the services among the nodes.

Table 2-1 Service requirements among the nodes

Node A B C D E

A - 32xE1 20xE1 32xE1 -

B 32xE1 - - - -

C 20xE1 - - - 12xE1

D 32xE1 - - 10xE1

E - - 12xE1 10xE1 -

Figure 2-1 shows the geographic position of each node and the available optical fiber cables.

Figure 2-1 Geographic position of each node and available optical fiber cables
Node A
(central equipment room)

25 km
2-core
Node B 40 km
2-core

2-core Node E
Node D 80 km
35 km
2-core 4-core

30 km
Node C
Optical fiber
Node
cable

The basic engineering plan is as follows:

l The central equipment room and the network management system (NMS) are set up at node
A.
l Nodes A, B, C, and D are connected by 2-core fibers. Nodes D and E are connected by 4-
core fibers.
l Line fibers are compliant with ITU-T G.652.
l The tributary E1 cables are 75-ohm coaxial cables.

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

l Nodes A, B, C, and D need to converge and groom services from different places. These
nodes bear large service capacities.
l The network level protection is required for the services between these nodes. The
equipment level protection is also required for the boards at node A.
Based on the routing of the fibers that are newly configured, the current service capacities, and
the forecast future service capacities, the optical ports used on the backbone lines at nodes A,
B, C, D, and E are 622 Mbit/s ports and the optical ports between the nodes D and E are 155
Mbit/s ports.

2.2 Engineering Planning


Based on the requirements, the engineering design department conducts planning and outputs
the detailed engineering information.

2.2.1 Networking Diagram


The networking diagram illustrates the architecture of the network.
2.2.2 IP Address Allocation Diagram
IP addresses need to be properly allocated to the NEs on a network according to the networking
diagram and specified service requirements.
2.2.3 Board Information of Each NE
This topic lists the boards that need to be configured on each NE according to the actual
networking and service requirements.
2.2.4 Fiber/Cable Connection Table
The fiber/cable connection is formed based on the networking architecture. The connection table
helps to connect the NEs properly and quickly.
2.2.5 Timeslot Allocation Diagram
The timeslot allocation diagram helps users learn the correct traffic direction and as a result the
service requirements for different NEs are properly fulfilled.
2.2.6 Board Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 2000 provides the board level protection schemes such as TPS and backup for
the SCC board, cross-connect and timing board, and PIU board. The protection schemes are
used to prevent service interruption from occurring in the case of a fault in the corresponding
boards.
2.2.7 Clock Tracing Diagram
The clock diagram helps to configure the correct clock tracing relations between NEs.
2.2.8 Orderwire Diagram
The orderwire diagram helps to configure the correct orderwire communication information for
different NEs.

2.2.1 Networking Diagram


The networking diagram illustrates the architecture of the network.
Based on the engineering situation and requirements, a MAN is constructed with the OptiX OSN
2000. See Figure 2-2. Table 2-2 lists the mapping relation between the place codes and NE
names. The line fibers are compliant with ITU-T G.652. The fiber attenuation coefficient is 0.275
dB/km (includes the attenuation of all the spliced joints and jumper connectors).

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Table 2-2 Mapping relation between the place codes and the NEs
Place Code NE Name

A NE1

B NE2

C NE3

D NE4

E NE5

Figure 2-2 Networking diagram

NE1 (A)

T2000
40 km
25 km
NE4 (D) NE5 (E)
NE2 (B)
STM-4 two-fiber bidirectional 80 km
MSP ring

STM-1 linear MSP


NE3 (C) chain

35 km 30 km

2.2.2 IP Address Allocation Diagram


IP addresses need to be properly allocated to the NEs on a network according to the networking
diagram and specified service requirements.
Figure 2-3 shows the IP address allocation diagram.

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Figure 2-3 IP address allocation diagram


NM ID T2000
IP address 129.9.0.254
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0

NE1

9-1
129.9.0.1

OSN 2000

NE2 129.9.0.1 NE4 NE5

9-2 9-4 9-5

129.9.0.2 STM-4 two-fiber bidirectional 129.9.0.4 129.9.0.5


MSP ring
OSN 2000 OSN 2000 OSN 2000

129.9.0.1 129.9.0.1 STM-1 linear MSP 129.9.0.1


chain

9-3
129.9.0.3
Extended ID–NE ID
IP address OSN 2000

Equipment type 129.9.0.1


Gateway NE3

2.2.3 Board Information of Each NE


This topic lists the boards that need to be configured on each NE according to the actual
networking and service requirements.
Figure 2-4 shows the board layout of NE1. Figure 2-5 shows the board layout of NE2 and NE3.
Figure 2-6 shows the board layout of NE4. Figure 2-7 shows the board layout of NE5.

Figure 2-4 Board layout of NE1


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S P
C I
X X
T T P P P C U A
C C
7 7 T T T U
S S
5 5 1 1 1 X
S P
4 4 P
S S
C I
A A
C U

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Figure 2-5 Board layout of NE2 and NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S P
C I
X X
T P C U A
C C
A T U
S S
1 1 X
S P
4 4
C I
A A
C U

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Figure 2-6 Board layout of NE4


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S P
C I
X X S S
T P C U A
C C L L
A T U
S S 1 1
1 1 X
S P
4 4 A A
C I
A A
C U

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Figure 2-7 Board layout of NE5


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S P
C I
X X
T P C U A
C C
A T U
S S
1 1 X
S P
1 1
C I
A A
C U

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

2.2.4 Fiber/Cable Connection Table


The fiber/cable connection is formed based on the networking architecture. The connection table
helps to connect the NEs properly and quickly.
Table 2-3 provides the fiber/cable connection between the NEs.

Table 2-3 Fiber/Cable connection between the NEs


Local End Remote End

NE Slot Board Port NE Slot Board Port


Name Name Number Name Name Numb
er

NE1 Slot 28 OSB4A TX NE2 Slot 27 OSB4A RX

NE1 Slot 28 OSB4A RX NE2 Slot 27 OSB4A TX

NE2 Slot 28 OSB4A TX NE3 Slot 27 OSB4A RX

NE2 Slot 28 OSB4A RX NE3 Slot 27 OSB4A TX

NE3 Slot 28 OSB4A TX NE4 Slot 27 OSB4A RX

NE3 Slot 28 OSB4A RX NE4 Slot 27 OSB4A TX

NE4 Slot 28 OSB4A TX NE1 Slot 27 OSB4A RX

NE4 Slot 28 OSB4A RX NE1 Slot 27 OSB4A TX

NE5 Slot 28 OSB1A TX NE4 Slot 11 SL1A RX

NE5 Slot 28 OSB1A RX NE4 Slot 11 SL1A TX

NE4 Slot 10 SL1A RX NE5 Slot 27 OSB1A TX

NE4 Slot 10 SL1A TX NE5 Slot 27 OSB1A RX

NOTE

The OSB1A/OSB4A in slot 27 is the line subboard integrated on the XCS1A/XCS4A board in slot 7. The
OSB1A/OSB4A in slot 28 is the line subboard integrated on the XCS1A/XCS4A board in slot 8.

2.2.5 Timeslot Allocation Diagram


The timeslot allocation diagram helps users learn the correct traffic direction and as a result the
service requirements for different NEs are properly fulfilled.
Figure 2-8 shows the timeslot allocation between the nodes.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Figure 2-8 Timeslot allocation diagram


Ring
Station
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1
Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

VC12:1-32 VC12:1-12
t4:1-32 t4:1-32 t4:1-12
1#VC4 VC12:33-52
t4:33-42,t5:33-42 t4:13-32

VC12:1-32
2#VC4
t4:1-32 t5:1-32

Line

Station NE4 NE5


Timeslot 10-SL1A-1 27-OSB1A-1

VC12:1-12
t4:1-12
1#VC4 VC12:13-22
t4:33-42 t4:13-22

Forward

Add/Drop

`
The t4 and t5 indicate the E1 tributary board in slots 4 and 5 respectively. The number that
follows the tributary board indicates the number of E1 path. For example, "t4:1-32" indicates
the first to the thirty-second E1 paths of the tributary board in slot 4. The numbers that are above
the horizontal lines indicate the timeslot number of the VC-4 that is occupied.
Consider NE4 as an example. The service shown in the diagram is as follows:
l The 12xE1 services from NE3 to NE5 pass through NE4 and occupy the timeslots 1 to 12
of the first VC-4.
l The E1 paths 33 to 42 of the tributary board in slot 4 of NE4 exchange services with the
E1 paths 13 to 22 of the tributary board in slot 4 of NE5. The timeslots 13 to 22 in the first
VC-4 carry the services.
l The E1 paths 1 to 32 of the tributary board in slot 4 of NE4 exchange services with the E1
paths 1 to 32 of the tributary board in slot 5 of NE1. The timeslots 1 to 32 in the second
VC-4 carry the services.

2.2.6 Board Level Protection


The OptiX OSN 2000 provides the board level protection schemes such as TPS and backup for
the SCC board, cross-connect and timing board, and PIU board. The protection schemes are
used to prevent service interruption from occurring in the case of a fault in the corresponding
boards.
Table 2-4 provides the information of the board level protection schemes.

2-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Table 2-4 Board level protection information

NE TPS Backup for Backup for the PIU Backup


Protection SCC Cross-
Connect and
Timing Board

NE1 √ √ √ √

NE2 × √ √ √

NE3 × √ √ √

NE4 × √ √ √

NE5 × √ √ √

2.2.7 Clock Tracing Diagram


The clock diagram helps to configure the correct clock tracing relations between NEs.

Figure 2-9 shows the clock tracing diagram of the network.

Figure 2-9 Clock tracing diagram

BITS
NE1

BITS/intr

NE4 NE5
NE2
S27/S28 S27/S28
S27/S28 /intr /intr
/intr

NE3
S27/S28
/intr

NE name Sn: slot where the line


intr: internal clock source Clock tracing
Clock source priority clock source exists direction
1/priority 2/priority 3

To prevent mutual tracing of clocks in this example, do as follows: enable the extended SSM,
set the clock ID of the external clock source 1 (BITS) on NE1 to 1, and set the clock ID of the
internal clock source to 2.

Connect the BITS to the external clock source 1 of NE1 and adopt SA4 as the synchronization
status byte.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

2.2.8 Orderwire Diagram


The orderwire diagram helps to configure the correct orderwire communication information for
different NEs.

Figure 2-10 shows the orderwire diagram.

Figure 2-10 Orderwire diagram


Extended ID-NE ID
NE name
Equipment type
9-1 Orderwire
NE1 phone/Conference call
OSN 2000
25 km
1001/9999 40 km

9-2 STM-4 linear


9-4 9-5
MSP chain
NE2 STM-4 two-fiber bidirectional NE4 NE5
OSN 2000 MSP ring OSN 2000 OSN 2000
1002/9999 80 km
1004/9999 1005/9999

9-3
NE3
OSN 2000 30 km
35 km
1003/9999

2.3 Engineering Preparation


Check the following items before configuring services on the T2000.

2.3.1 NE Side
Check the following items and make sure that the equipment functions properly.
2.3.2 T2000 Side
Check the following items and make sure that the equipment can be normally managed by the
T2000.
2.3.3 Document
Make sure that the relevant documents are available so that the correct configuration information
can be easily accessed in the networking process.

2.3.1 NE Side
Check the following items and make sure that the equipment functions properly.

l The OptiX OSN 2000 must be installed.


l The single-station commissioning must be complete.
l The fibers between stations must be connected correctly.
l The NE IDs, extended IDs, and the IP address of the gateway NE (GNE) must be set as
shown in Figure 2-3.

2-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

2.3.2 T2000 Side


Check the following items and make sure that the equipment can be normally managed by the
T2000.

l The T2000 software and hardware must be installed correctly.


l The T2000 server must run normally.
l The communication between the T2000 and GNE must be established and must be normal.

2.3.3 Document
Make sure that the relevant documents are available so that the correct configuration information
can be easily accessed in the networking process.

l The engineering planning information must be available.


l After logging in to the T2000 client, the user must be able to use the key F1 to view the
online Help.
l The manuals for the OptiX OSN 2000 and the OptiX iManager T2000 must be available.

2.4 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure SDH/PDH services.
NOTE

This section describes the procedures and precautions for configuring services in an SDH network on the
T2000. For details, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Operation Guide for SDH.

Procedures for configuring SDH services on the T2000 are listed as follows.

Table 2-5 Procedures for configuring SDH/PDH services

Procedure Operation

1 2.5 Logging In to the T2000

2 2.6 Creating a Topology

3 2.7 Configuring Communication

4 2.8 Creating an NE User

5 2.9 Logging In to an NE

6 2.10 Creating a Board

7 2.11 Creating Fibers

8 2.12 Creating a Topology Subnet

9 2.13 Configuring Protection

10 2.14 Configuring the Clock

11 2.15 Configuring SDH/PDH Services by Using the Trail Function

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Procedure Operation

12 2.16 Configuring SDH/PDH Services by Using the Per-NE


Configuration Function

13 2.17 Configuring Parameters of SDH/PDH Boards

14 2.18 Configuring Overhead Bytes

15 2.19 Configuring the Orderwire

16 2.20 Enabling/Disabling Performance Monitoring

17 2.21 Setting Alarm Parameters

18 2.22 Configuring Automatic Laser Shutdown

19 2.23 Backing Up the NE Configuration Data

20 2.24 Backing Up the T2000 Configuration Data

2.5 Logging In to the T2000


The T2000 provides all the NE-layer management functions, including the fault management,
performance management, configuration management, security management, communication
management, topology management, and system management. In addition, the T2000 provides
certain network-layer management functions. This topic describes how to log in to the T2000.

Prerequisite
l The T2000 server and client must be started and the server must operate normally.
l The user must know the user name and password.

Precautions

CAUTION
l If the T2000 server and T2000 client are installed on one computer, set the IP address and
port number of the T2000 server to 127.0.0.1 and 9800 respectively, to log in to the T2000.
l If the T2000 server and T2000 client are on different computers, enter the actual IP address
for the IP address of the T2000 server and 9800 for the port number, to log in to the T2000.
l By default, the server is in the common mode. The server mode can also be switched to the
security (SSL) mode. You need not enter the port number manually. After the mode is
selected, the system automatically selects the corresponding port number. If the server and
the client are installed on different computers, the modes must be the same. Otherwise, the
client fails to log in to the server.

2-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the T2000Client icon on the desktop to enter the Login interface.
Step 2 Enter the following user information in the Login interface:
l User Name: admin
l Password: T2000

Step 3 Click , and Click Add Server in the Server Setting dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Enter the following T2000 server information in the dialog box:
l IP Address: 129.9.0.254
l Port: 9800
l Mode: Common
l Server Name: T2000

Step 5 Click OK. Select the corresponding server, and then click OK.

CAUTION
By default, the initial user name of the T2000 is admin, and the password is T2000. To ensure
security, change this password immediately after you log in to the system. The IP address
provided in this example may not be the IP address of the server. Hence, you need to set the IP
address according to the actual situation.

Step 6 Click Login. After the data is loaded, the Main Topology is displayed on the T2000.

----End

2.6 Creating a Topology


This topic describes how to create, display, and manage an NE on the T2000.

2.6.1 Creating a Gateway NE: NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure a gateway NE (NE1).
2.6.2 Creating Non-Gateway NEs: NE2–NE5

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

This topic uses an example to describe how to configure non-gateway NEs (NE2–NE5).

2.6.1 Creating a Gateway NE: NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure a gateway NE (NE1).

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be a T2000 user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the Main Topology and choose New > Device. Then, select the NE type: OSN
Series > OptiX OSN 2000.

Step 2 Enter the NE attributes into the dialog box according to the IP address allocation diagram as
shown in Figure 2-3.
l ID: 1
l Extended ID: 9
l Name: NE1
l Gateway Type: Gateway
l Protocol: IP
l IP Address: 129.9.0.1
l Connection Mode: Common
l Port: 1400
l NE User: root
l Password: password
l Clear the NE Preconfiguration check box.

Step 3 Click OK.

Step 4 Click on the Main Topology, and the icon of NE1 is displayed. There are and above the
NE1 icon. indicates the gateway and indicates that the NE is not configured.

----End

2.6.2 Creating Non-Gateway NEs: NE2–NE5


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure non-gateway NEs (NE2–NE5).

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be a T2000 user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

2-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the Main Topology and choose New > Device . Then, select the NE type: OSN
Series > OptiX OSN 2000 .

Step 2 Enter the NE attributes into the dialog box according to the IP address allocation diagram as
shown in Figure 2-3.
l ID: 2
l Extended ID: 9
l Name: NE2
l Gateway Type: Non-Gateway
l Affiliated Gateway: NE1
l Affiliated Gateway Protocol: IP
l NE User: root
l Password: password
l Clear the NE Preconfiguration check box.

Step 3 Click OK.

Step 4 Click on the Main Topology, and the icon of NE2 is displayed. There is a above the icon to
indicate that the NE is not configured.

Step 5 Refer to Steps 1–4 to create the NE icons for NE3, NE4, and NE5 respectively.

----End

2.7 Configuring Communication


This topic describes how to set the Ethernet access function of an NE on the T2000. By default,
an NE supports access of the T2000 through Ethernet.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
When the Ethernet access control is enabled, the NE communication is reset.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE1 icon on the Main Topology. Right-click and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 2 Select NE1 from the Object Tree and choose Communication > Access Control from the
Function Tree.

Step 3 Set The First Network Port to Enabled in the Ethernet Access Control window.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

2.8 Creating an NE User


This topic describes how to create an NE user on the T2000. The NE user can specify the authority
of the NE operator, thus facilitating the control of the NE access and configuration.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Background Information
There are five levels of user authority, and they are monitor, operation, maintenance, system,
and debug in an ascending order of priority. A higher level user has the authority of the lower
level. For example, an operation level user has the authority of the monitor level, and the highest
level user has all the authority. Table 2-6 provides the authority pertaining to each level.

Table 2-6 NE user level and authority description

NE User Level Authority

Monitor level All query commands, login and logout, and modification to its own
password

Operation level All settings for fault and performance, certain security settings, and
certain configurations

Maintenance level Certain security settings, certain configurations, communication


settings, and log management

System level All security settings and all configurations

Debug level All security settings, all configurations, and all debugging
commands

2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Different NE users are used to log in to different T2000 systems. Table 2-7 lists the NE user
flags.

Table 2-7 NE user flag


NE User Flag Description

LCT NE user An NE user who manages NEs on the local craft terminal (LCT)

EMS NE user An NE user who manages NEs on the element management system
(EMS), that is, on the T2000

CMD NE user An NE user who manages NEs by using commands

Universal NE user An NE user who does not belong to any particular T2000 category

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > NE Security Management > NE User Management from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Select NE1–NE5 from the navigation tree and click .


Step 3 Select NE1–NE5 and click Add.
Step 4 Enter the attributes of the added NE user: user name, user level, user flag, password, and a
detailed description of the new NE user. For example, create a unified NE user T2000 for NE1–
NE5, as shown in the following figure. The user name contains 4 to 16 characters. The password
contains 6 to 16 characters, including at least one letter and one numeral. For description on the
user level and priority, refer to Table 2-6. For description of the user flag, refer to Table 2-7.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 5 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

2.9 Logging In to an NE
This topic describes how to switch the NE users on the T2000. Different clients cannot use the
same NE user ID to log in to or manage an NE. Otherwise, the client automatically logs out of
the NE when another client logs in to the NE.

Prerequisite
l The NE user to log in to the NE must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > NE Security Management > NE Login Management from the Main Menu.

2-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Step 2 Select NE1–NE5 from the navigation tree and click .


Step 3 Select NE1–NE5, and then click Switch NE User.
Step 4 Enter the user name and password of the NE user to switch to. For example, switch the NE users
of NE1–NE5 to the T2000 user.

Step 5 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

2.10 Creating a Board


This topic describes how to create a board in the configuration wizard or the NE panel diagram.
Before you configure services on an NE and to manage an NE, create the boards.
You can create a board by using either of the following methods:
l Add a board in the configuration wizard. This applies to NEs that are not configured.
l Add a board on the NE panel manually. This is applicable to NEs that are configured.
NOTE

l The AUX board integrates the STI board. Hence, create the AUX and STI boards when creating the
AUX on the T2000.
l The AUX1 board integrates the ST1 and LA1 boards. Hence, create the AUX, ST1, and the LA1 boards
when creating the AUX1 on the T2000.
l The XCS1A/XCS4A/XCS16 board integrates the XCS and OSB1A/OSB4A/OSB16 boards. Hence,
create the XCS and OSB1A/OSB4A/OSB16 boards when creating the XCS1A/XCS4A/XCS16 on the
T2000.

2.10.1 Adding a Board in the Configuration Wizard

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

This topic describes how to configure a board by using the configuration wizard. This method
applies to the NE that is not configured.
2.10.2 Adding a Board in the NE panel Manually
This topic describes how to configure a board in the NE panel. This method applies to the NE
that is configured.

2.10.1 Adding a Board in the Configuration Wizard


This topic describes how to configure a board by using the configuration wizard. This method
applies to the NE that is not configured.

Prerequisite
l The board to be created must be installed and it must work normally.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology. Then, the NE Configuration Wizard is
displayed.
Step 2 Select Manual Configuration and click Next.
Step 3 Confirm the NE attributes and click Next.
Step 4 Then, the NE panel diagram is displayed. Click Query Physical Slot(s), and the board that is
already installed on the NE side is displayed. Then, click Next.

2-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Step 5 Select Verify and Run, and click Finish. The configuration data is delivered to the NE side.

Step 6 Refer to Steps 1–5 to configure NE2, NE3, NE4, and NE5. Figure 2-4 shows the board layout
of NE1. Figure 2-5 shows the board layout of NE2 and NE3. Figure 2-6 shows the board layout
of NE4. Figure 2-7 shows the board layout of NE5.

----End

2.10.2 Adding a Board in the NE panel Manually


This topic describes how to configure a board in the NE panel. This method applies to the NE
that is configured.

Prerequisite
l The board to be created must be installed and it must work normally.
l The NE must be configured.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology. Then, the NE panel diagram is displayed.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 2 See Figure 2-4 and right-click the slot to be added with a board, and select the corresponding
board.
Step 3 Click to exit the NE panel diagram.

Step 4 Refer to Steps 1–3 to configure NE2, NE3, NE4, and NE5. Figure 2-5 shows the board layout
of NEs 2 and 3. Figure 2-6 shows the board layout of NE4. Figure 2-7 shows the board layout
of NE5.

----End

2.11 Creating Fibers


This topic describes how to create fibers on the T2000. After fibers are created, they are displayed
on the T2000.
Create fibers in either of the following methods:
l Manually creating fibers: This method is applicable to scenarios where few fibers are to be
created.
l Automatically searching for and then creating fibers: This method is applicable to scenarios
where many fibers are to be created.
2.11.1 Creating Fibers Manually
This topic describes how to create fibers manually. This method is applicable to creating a small
number of fibers one after another.
2.11.2 Creating Fibers Automatically
This topic describes how to search and create fibers automatically. This method is applicable
when fibers are created in batches.

2.11.1 Creating Fibers Manually


This topic describes how to create fibers manually. This method is applicable to creating a small
number of fibers one after another.

Prerequisite
l The fibers between the equipment must be correctly connected. The boards that are
connected to the fibers must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Select from the shortcut icons of the Main Topology. Then, the mouse pointer changes to
.
Step 2 Click on the Main Topology to select the fiber source NE NE1, and select the source board 28-
OSB4A, and the source port 1.
Step 3 Click on the Main Topology to select the fiber source NE NE2, and select the source board 27-
OSB4A, and the source port 1.
Step 4 Set the fiber attributes from the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box and click OK.

2-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

TIP

If you click Apply in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, you can continue to create other fibers without
repeating Step 1.

Step 5 Refer to Steps 1–4 to create a fiber connection between NEs so that the five NEs form a ring
with a chain. Table 2-3 provides the connection relation between the fibers and cables.

----End

2.11.2 Creating Fibers Automatically


This topic describes how to search and create fibers automatically. This method is applicable
when fibers are created in batches.

Prerequisite
l The fibers between the equipment must be correctly connected. The boards that are
connected to the fibers must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Search for Fiber/Cable from the Main Menu.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 2 Select NE1–NE5 from the Navigation Tree on the left and click Search. A progress bar is
displayed indicating the progress of the operation.
Step 3 After the operation is complete, a dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close.
Step 4 Select one or several fibers from Newly Searched Fiber and click Create Fiber/Cable.

----End

2.12 Creating a Topology Subnet


This topic describes how to create a topology subnet on the T2000 and how to include the created
NEs into the topology subnet. A topology subnet is created to simplify the GUI and has no impact
on the running NEs. To facilitate management, the topology objects in the same network area
or with similar attributes are displayed in one subnet.

Prerequisite
l The NEs must be created on the T2000 correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

The subnet that is created in this example is only a topology concept. You can place the topology objects
in a network into a subnet for display.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the Main Topology and choose New > Subnet to enter the Add Object dialog
box.
Step 2 Click the Properties tab, and enter the subnet name OptiX OSN 2000.

Step 3 Click the Select Object tab and select NE1–NE5 from Available Objects. Click to add
the NEs to Selected Objects.
Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 After the subnet is created successfully, the icon is displayed on the Main Topology.
Step 6 Double-click or right-click the icon of this subnet, and then choose Enter. You can only enter
the topology view that contains this topology only. Right-click on this topology to choose Up
and you can enter the Main Topology that contains all the topology objects.

----End

2.13 Configuring Protection


This topic describes how to create a protection subnet and TPS protection group, for example,
a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a 1+1 protection chain. The protection subnet provides
a network level protection for the services of each NE on the protection subnet. The TPS
protection provides the board level protection for the services.

2-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

2.13.1 Creating a Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring


NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4 form a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. Before the service
configuration, you need to create a protection subnet.
2.13.2 Creating a 1+1 Linear MSP Chain
NE4 and NE5 form a 1+1 protection chain.
2.13.3 Configuring TPS Protection
This topic describes how to configure TPS protection on the T2000.

2.13.1 Creating a Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring


NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4 form a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. Before the service
configuration, you need to create a protection subnet.

Prerequisite
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual topology.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > Create SDH Protection Subnet > 2f_MS_SPRing from the Main
Menu. Then, the Wizard for Creating Two-Fiber Bidirectional MS Shared Protection
Ring is displayed.

Step 2 Set the following parameters in the Wizard for Creating Two-Fiber Bidirectional MS Shared
Protection Ring dialog box:
l Name: 2f_MS_SPRing_1
l Level: STM-4

Step 3 Double-click the icons of NE1 to NE4 in the topology view on the right in turn to add them into
the protection subnet. The Node Attributes parameter uses the default value MSP Node. Then,
click Next.

Step 4 Confirm Physical Link Information and click Finish.

Step 5 A dialog box is displayed indicating that the protection subnet is successfully created.

----End

2.13.2 Creating a 1+1 Linear MSP Chain


NE4 and NE5 form a 1+1 protection chain.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual topology.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > Create SDH Protection Subnet > 1+1 linear MSP from the
Main Menu. Then, the Wizard for Creating 1+1 Linear MSP Chain dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Set the following parameters in the Wizard for Creating 1+1 Linear MSP Chain dialog box:
l Name: 1+1_MSP_1
l Level: STM-1
l Revertive Mode: Non-Revertive
l Switching Mode: Single-Ended Switching

Step 3 Double-click the NE4 and NE5 icons in turn in the topology view on the right to add them to
the protection subnet. Then, Click Next.

Step 4 Confirm Physical Link Information and click Finish.

Step 5 A dialog box is displayed indicating that the protection subnet is successfully created.

----End

2.13.3 Configuring TPS Protection


This topic describes how to configure TPS protection on the T2000.

Prerequisite
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual topology.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

2-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Background Information
NOTE

The T2000 automatically creates the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, clock unit, and cross-connect unit
according to the board configurations. Thus, you need not configure the 1+1 protection manually.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.
Step 2 Select NE1 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > TPS Protection from the
Function Tree.
Step 3 Click Create and set the following parameters in the Create SDH TPS Protection Group dialog
box:
l Protection Board: 11-PT1P
l Working Board: 4-PT1, 5-PT1
l WTR Time(s): 600
l Priority: Priority-1 for the 4-PT1, Priority-2 for the 5-PT1

Step 4 Click OK.


----End

2.14 Configuring the Clock


This topic describes how to configure a clock on the T2000. After you set the clock source and
specify the clock priority level, You need to enable the SSM or extended SSM protocol to prevent
the NE from tracing the incorrect clock source, thus providing protection. For the clock.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

CAUTION
l The NE can trace the external clock, the building integrated timing supply (BITS), line clock,
tributary clock, and internal clock. To realize clock protection, you need to set a minimum
of two clock tracing sources. Normally, the tributary clock is not used as the reference clock
of the clock subnet.
l When the extended SSM protocol is disabled, do not set the clock into a loop or trace the
loopback clock source to prevent clock interlock.
l When the extended SSM protocol is enabled, the clock can be set to a loop.

2.14.1 Configuring the Clock Source Priority Table


This topic describes how to configure the clock source priority table.
2.14.2 Configuring a Clock Subnet
This topic describes how to configure a clock subnet, including the procedures and parameter
settings.

2.14.1 Configuring the Clock Source Priority Table


This topic describes how to configure the clock source priority table.

Prerequisite
l To realize clock protection, a minimum of two clock tracing sources must be configured.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.
Step 2 Select NE1 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source
Priority from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
Step 4 Click Create. Select External Clock Source 1.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Select External Clock Source 1. Set the default value for External Clock Source Mode and
Synchronous Status Byte.
NOTE

In this example, set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for NE1 only.

Step 7 Set External Clock Source 1 to the highest priority and click Apply. Select External Clock

Source 1. You can click to lower its priority or to increase its priority.
The priority of the internal clock source should be the lowest.
Step 8 Click Apply.

2-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Step 9 See Figure 2-9 and refer to Steps 1–7 to set clock tracing source and clock priority table of NE2,
NE3, NE4, and NE5.

----End

2.14.2 Configuring a Clock Subnet


This topic describes how to configure a clock subnet, including the procedures and parameter
settings.

Prerequisite
l To realize clock protection, a minimum of two clock tracing sources must be configured.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

In this example, all NEs belong to the same clock subnet and use the extended SSM protocol. Hence, the
two parameters Line Ports of SSM Output Control and Line Ports of Clock ID Status are set to
Enabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.
Step 2 Select NE1 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Click the Clock Subnet tab and set the following parameters:
l Affiliated Subnet: 0
l Protection Status: Start Extended SSM Protocol
l Clock Source ID of External Clock Source 1: 1
l Clock Source ID of Internal Clock Source: 2

Step 4 Click Apply.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

NOTE

In this example, only NE1 requires the setting of the clock source ID.

Step 5 Click the Clock Quality tab and then click the Clock Source Quality tab. Set Configuration
Quality as follows:
l External Clock Source 1: Automatic Extraction
l Internal Clock Source: Automatic Extraction

Step 6 Click Apply.

Step 7 Click the SSM Output Control tab. Set Control Status of line ports 27-OSB4A (SDH-1) and
28-OSB4A (SDH-1) to Enabled.

Step 8 Click Apply.

Step 9 Select Clock ID Status. Set the enable status of line ports 27-OSB4A (SDH-1) and 28-OSB4A
(SDH-1) to Enabled.

Step 10 Click Apply.

Step 11 Refer to Steps 1–10 to set the clock subnet parameters of NE2, NE3, NE4, and NE5.

----End

2.15 Configuring SDH/PDH Services by Using the Trail


Function
This topic describes how to configure SDH/PDH services and the server layer trail by using the
trail function on the T2000. The trail function provides end-to-end service configuration between
NEs.

On the T2000, SDH and PDH services can be configured by using either of the following
methods:

l Using the trail function


l Using the single station configuration, that is, perform the configuration on the per-NE
basis: The service must be capable of being added to/dropped from the NEs at two ends
and passed through the intermediate NEs.

2-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

NOTE

l You need to obtain the license for the trail function. Otherwise, you can only use the station
configuration function.
l Before you configure the services, query the remaining available resources by choosing Report > TU
Port Resource Statistics.

2.15.1 Creating a VC-4 Server Trail


The VC-4 server layer trail is used to carry VC-12/VC-3 services between NEs. Before
configuring the VC-12/VC-3 services, create the VC-4 server layer trail. You need not create a
VC-4 server layer trail for VC-4 services.
2.15.2 Creating a VC-12 Trail
This topic describes how to create a VC-12 trail, including the operations and parameter settings.

2.15.1 Creating a VC-4 Server Trail


The VC-4 server layer trail is used to carry VC-12/VC-3 services between NEs. Before
configuring the VC-12/VC-3 services, create the VC-4 server layer trail. You need not create a
VC-4 server layer trail for VC-4 services.

Prerequisite
l The preceding operations must be complete.
l The license for using the trail function must be available.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > SDH Trail Creation from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Set the following parameters in the SDH Trail Creation window:
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Level: VC4 Server Trail
l Resource Usage Strategy: Protected Resource
l Protection Priority Strategy: Trail Protection First

Step 3 Select the source NE and sink NE. Double-click the NE in the topology view on the right, and
select the source NE NE1 and sink NE NE2. If you double-click the NE again, the selection is
cancelled. Alternatively, click Browse to select an NE. The selected source NE is marked as
, and the selected sink NE is marked as .

Step 4 Click Set Route Timeslot. Set Timeslot to 1 and click OK. Select Auto-Calculation. The trail
marked with an arrow is displayed between the source NE and the sink NE in the topology view
on the right.

Step 5 Set the trail parameters as follows:


l Name: NE1-NE2-VC4 Server Trail-0001
l Order No.: 1

Step 6 Select the Activate the trail and Copy after Creation check boxes.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 7 Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed indicating that the trail is created successfully. Click
Close.
Step 8 In the displayed Copy dialog box, set the following parameters and then click Add:
l Source: NE1-28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)-VC4:2
l Sink: NE2-27-OSBA4-1(SDH-1)-VC4:2

Step 9 Select the Specify the start timeslot check box and set the parameter to 2. Set The start value
of the trail name suffix to 2.
Step 10 Select Activate. Click OK to create a VC-4 server layer trail.
Step 11 Refer to Steps 1–10 to create the VC-4 service trails for paths 1–2 between adjacent NEs: NE2
and NE3, NE3 and NE4, and NE4 and NE1. Refer to Steps 1–7 to create the VC-4 service trail
for path 1 between NE4 and NE5.

----End

2.15.2 Creating a VC-12 Trail


This topic describes how to create a VC-12 trail, including the operations and parameter settings.

Prerequisite
l The preceding operations must be complete.
l The license for using the trail function must be available.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > SDH Trail Creation from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Set the following parameters in the SDH Trail Creation window:
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Level: VC12
l Resource Usage Strategy: Protected Resource
l Protection Priority Strategy: Trail Protection First

2-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Step 3 Select the source and the sink. See Figure 2-8 and create the service of each NE. Double-click
the icon of NE1 in the topology view on the right. In the Select Board Port-Source-NE1 dialog
box, click the PT1 board in slot 4 on the NE panel diagram. Select 1 for Tributary Port.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Double-click the icon of NE2 in the topology view on the right. In the Select Board Port-Sink-
NE2 dialog box, click the PT1 board in slot 4 on the NE panel diagram. Select 1 for Tributary
Port.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Optional: Double-click the icon of NE4 in the topology view on the right to specify the backup
route provided by the system that does not pass through NE4. is displayed above NE4. You
can specify the route that should not be used to pass through a certain NE with this method. This
ensures that the routing direction conforms to the requirement. Normally, it is not selected.
Step 8 Click Set Route Timeslot. When the Set Route Timeslot dialog box is displayed, click the
choice box under Timeslot to select timeslot 1[1-1-1] for the service on the VC-4.
Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Set the following parameters in the SDH Trail Creation window:
l Name: NE1-NE2-VC12-0001
l Order No.: 1

Step 11 Select the Activate the trail and Copy after Creation check boxes to allow the duplication of
other 31 E1 services from NE1 to NE2 after the creation of this E1 timeslot.
Step 12 Click Apply.
Step 13 In the displayed Copy dialog box, set the following parameters and then click Add:
l Source: NE1-4-PT1-2(SDH_TU-2)–NE1-4-PT1-32(SDH_TU-32)
l Sink: NE2-4-PT1-2(SDH_TU-2)–NE2-4-PT1-32(SDH_TU-32)

Step 14 Select the Select Timeslots/Port check box. Set the Specify the start timeslot of the 31 E1s on
the VC-4 to 2: 2-1-1. Set The start value of the trail name suffix to 2. Select Activated.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 15 Click OK.


Step 16 Refer to Steps 1–15 to create the E1 service from NE1 to NE3 and NE1 to NE4, and then the
E1 service between NE3, NE4, and NE5.
----End

2.16 Configuring SDH/PDH Services by Using the Per-NE


Configuration Function
This topic describes how to configure SDH/PDH services by using the per-NE configuration
function.
NOTE

When using the per-NE configuration function to configure services, you need not configure the VC-4
server layer trail. Instead, configure cross-connections of services on NE1 to NE5 in turn. This topic can
be skipped if the SDH/PDH service has been configured by using the trail function.
NOTE

Before you configure the services, query the remaining available resources by choosing Report > TU Port
Resource Statistics.

2-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

NOTE

l Before configuring add/drop services, configure bidirectional services from line boards to tributary
boards.
l Before configuring pass-through services, configure bidirectional services between line boards.

2.16.1 Creating Services on NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.
2.16.2 Creating Services on NE2
This topic describes how to configure the data of NE2 through an example.
2.16.3 Creating Services on NE3
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.
2.16.4 Creating Services on NE4
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE4.
2.16.5 Creating Services on NE5
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE5.

2.16.1 Creating Services on NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.

Prerequisite
l The preceding operations must be complete.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.

Step 2 Select NE1 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree. Click .

Step 3 According to Figure 2-8, create the E1 service from NE1 to NE2: from ports 1–32 of the 4-PT1
tributary board to timeslots 1–32 of the first VC-4 on the 28-OSB4A optical interface board.
Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 4-PT1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–32
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–32
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 According to Figure 2-8, create the E1 services from NE1 to NE3: from ports 33–42 of the 4-
PT1 tributary board to timeslots 33–42 of the first VC-4 on the 28-OSB4A optical interface
board and from ports 33–42 of the 5-PT1 tributary board to timeslots 43–52 of the first VC-4
on the 28-OSB4A optical interface board. Click Create. Set the following parameters in the
Create SDH Service dialog box:
1. Set the service from the 4-PT1 board to the 28-OSB4A board as follows:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 4-PT1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 33–42
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 33–42
l Activate Immediately: Yes
2. Set the service from the 5-PT1 board to the 28-OSB4A board as follows:
l Level: VC12

2-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 5-PT1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 33–42
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 43–52
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 6 Click OK.

Step 7 According to Figure 2-8, create the E1 service from NE1 to NE4: from ports 1–32 of the 5-PT1
tributary board to timeslots 1–32 of the second VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface board.
Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 5-PT1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–32
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–32
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 8 Click OK.

----End

2.16.2 Creating Services on NE2


This topic describes how to configure the data of NE2 through an example.

Prerequisite
l The preceding operations must be complete.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Click in NE Explorer and select the NE2 icon from the Object Tree. Then, click OK.

Step 2 Select NE2 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree. Click .
Step 3 According to Figure 2-8, create the E1 service from NE2 to NE1: from ports 1–32 of the 4-PT1
tributary board to timeslots 1–32 of the first VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface board.
Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

l Source Slot: 4-PT1


l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–32
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–32
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 According to Figure 2-8, configure the service from NE1 to NE3 that passes through NE2: from
timeslots 33–52 of the first VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface board to timeslots 33-52
of the first VC-4 on the 28-OSB4A optical interface board. Click Create. Set the following
parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 33–52
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 33–52
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

2.16.3 Creating Services on NE3


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

Prerequisite
l The preceding operations must be complete.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Click in NE Explorer and select the NE3 icon from the Object Tree. Then, click OK.

Step 2 Select NE3 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree. Click .

Step 3 According to Figure 2-8, create the E1 services from NE3 to NE1: from ports 13–32 of the 4-
PT1 tributary board to timeslots 33–52 of the first VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface
board. Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12

2-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 4-PT1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 13–32
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 33–52
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 According to Figure 2-8, create the E1 services from NE3 to NE5: from ports 1–12 of the 4-
PT1 tributary board to timeslots 1–12 of the first VC-4 on the 28-OSB4A optical interface board.
Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 4-PT1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

2.16.4 Creating Services on NE4


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE4.

Prerequisite
l The preceding operations must be complete.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Click in NE Explorer and select the NE4 icon from the Object Tree. Then, click OK.

Step 2 Select NE4 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree. Click .
Step 3 According to Figure 2-8, create the E1 service from NE4 to NE1: from ports 1–32 of the 4-PT1
tributary board to timeslots 1–32 of the second VC-4 on the 28-OSB4A optical interface board.
Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

l Source Slot: 4-PT1


l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–32
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–32
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 4 Click OK.


Step 5 According to Figure 2-8, configure the E1 service from NE3 to NE5 that passes through NE4:
from timeslots 1–12 of the first VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface board to timeslots 1-12
of the first VC-4 on the 110-SL1A optical interface board. Click Create. Set the following
parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Sink Slot: 10-SL1A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Activate Immediately: Yes

2-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Step 6 Click OK.


Step 7 According to Figure 2-8, create the E1 services from NE4 to NE5: from ports 33–42 of the 4-
PT1 tributary board to timeslots 13–22 of the first VC-4 on the 10-SL1A optical interface board.
Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 4-PT1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 33–42
l Sink Slot: 10-SL1A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 13–22
l Activate Immediately: Yes
Step 8 Click OK.
----End

2.16.5 Creating Services on NE5


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE5.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l The preceding operations must be complete.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Click in NE Explorer and select the NE5 icon from the Object Tree. Then, click OK.
Step 2 Select NE5 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree. Click .
Step 3 According to Figure 2-8, create the E1 services from NE5 to NE3: from ports 1–12 of the 4-
PT1 tributary board to timeslots 1–12 of the first VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface board.
Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 4-PT1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 4 Click OK.


Step 5 According to Figure 2-8, create the E1 services from NE5 to NE4: from ports 13–22 of the 4-
PT1 tributary board to timeslots 13–22 of the first VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface
board. Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 4-PT1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 13–22
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 13–22
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

2.17 Configuring Parameters of SDH/PDH Boards


Common SDH board parameters include Laser Switch, Optical Interface Loopback, and
VC-4 Loopback. Common PDH board parameters include Service Load Indication and
Tributary Loopback.

2-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Prerequisite
l Trails must be created and activated.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

For settings of the board parameters, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Help.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters of SDH boards on each NE according to the requirements.

Step 2 Set the parameters of PDH boards on each NE according to the requirements.

----End

2.18 Configuring Overhead Bytes


This topic describes how to configure overhead bytes on the T2000. You can set the overhead
bytes for maintaining or monitoring trails.
2.18.1 Configuring the RS Overhead J0
J0 is an RS trace byte. It is used to verify that a section receiver is connected to the intended
transmitter. This topic describes how to configure the J0 byte on the T2000. This topic describes
how to configure the regenerator section (RS) overhead byte J0 on the T2000.
2.18.2 Configuring the Tracing Byte J1
The J1 byte allows a receiving terminal to verify its continued connection to the intended
transmitting terminal. This topic describes how to configure the J1 byte on the T2000. The tracing
byte can be set as any same characters at both ends if the interconnection involves only the
equipment from the same vendor. If the interconnection involves equipment from different
vendors, the tracing bytes should be set to defined characters. Otherwise, the interconnection
fails.
2.18.3 Configuring the Signal Flag Byte C2
The C2 byte specifies the multiplex structure and the service type such as PDH services. This
topic describes how to configure the C2 byte on the T2000.

2.18.1 Configuring the RS Overhead J0


J0 is an RS trace byte. It is used to verify that a section receiver is connected to the intended
transmitter. This topic describes how to configure the J0 byte on the T2000. This topic describes
how to configure the regenerator section (RS) overhead byte J0 on the T2000.

Prerequisite
l Trails must be created and activated.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.

Step 2 Select 27-OSB4A from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Double-click J0 to be Sent([Mode]Content). Set Input in Text Format, Byte Mode, and
Input Mode for overhead bytes.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Double-click J0 to be Received([Mode]Content). Set Input in Text Format, Byte Mode, and
Input Mode for overhead bytes.

Step 6 Click OK.

Step 7 Click Query to query J0 Received([Mode]Content).

----End

2.18.2 Configuring the Tracing Byte J1


The J1 byte allows a receiving terminal to verify its continued connection to the intended
transmitting terminal. This topic describes how to configure the J1 byte on the T2000. The tracing
byte can be set as any same characters at both ends if the interconnection involves only the
equipment from the same vendor. If the interconnection involves equipment from different
vendors, the tracing bytes should be set to defined characters. Otherwise, the interconnection
fails.

Prerequisite
l Trails must be created and activated.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

The VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 tracing byte J1 can be queried or set only after the VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 cross-
connection is created.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.

Step 2 Select 27-OSB4A from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click the Tracing byte J1 tab. Double-click J1 to be Sent([Mode]Content). Set Input in Text
Format, Byte Mode, and Input Mode for overhead bytes.

Step 4 Click OK.

2-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Step 5 Double-click J1 to be Received([Mode]Content). Set Input in Text Format, Byte Mode, and
Input Mode for overhead bytes.
Step 6 Click OK.

Step 7 Click Query to query J1 Received([Mode]Content).

----End

2.18.3 Configuring the Signal Flag Byte C2


The C2 byte specifies the multiplex structure and the service type such as PDH services. This
topic describes how to configure the C2 byte on the T2000.

Prerequisite
l Trails must be created and activated.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

The C2 byte of this VC-3/VC-4 can be set or queried only when cross-connections at the VC-3/VC-4 level
are created.
The T2000 processes the write/read attributes of overhead bytes in the extended mode or general mode. In
the extended mode, the T2000 has more capacities to process the write/read attributes of overhead bytes.
Set the C2 byte only after the mode is set to the extended mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.
Step 2 Select 27-OSB4A from the Object Tree. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management >
VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Click the Signal Flag C2 tab and click Options. Set the mode to Extended Mode in the dialog
box that is displayed. Click OK.

Step 4 Click Query to query C2 to be Received.

Step 5 Set C2 to be Sent and C2 to be Received. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 6 Click Apply.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

2.19 Configuring the Orderwire


This topic describes how to configure the orderwire on the T2000. If the NE is provisioned with
an orderwire, the network maintenance personnel can use the orderwire as a private
communication channel during emergencies.
2.19.1 Configuring the Orderwire of NE1–NE3
This topic describes how to configure the orderwire of NE1–NE3.
2.19.2 Configuring the Orderwire of NE4
This topic describes how to configure the orderwire of NE4.
2.19.3 Configuring the Orderwire of NE5
This topic describes how to configure the orderwire of NE5 on the T2000.

2.19.1 Configuring the Orderwire of NE1–NE3


This topic describes how to configure the orderwire of NE1–NE3.

Prerequisite
l The NEs and boards must be created on the T2000.
l The orderwire board must be installed correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
Make sure that the call waiting time of each node is the same. When 30 or less nodes exist, set
the call waiting time to 5s. When more than 30 nodes exist, set the call waiting time to 9s.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE1 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.

Step 2 Select NE1 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree.

Step 3 Click the General tab and see Figure 2-10 to set the following parameters:
l Call Waiting Time(s): 5
l Conference Call: 9999
l Phone 1: 1001
l Available Orderwire Port: 27-OSB4A-1, 28-OSB4A-1

2-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Step 4 Click Apply.


Step 5 Click the Conference Call tab. Select 27-OSB4A-1 and 28-OSB4A-1 into Selected Conference
Call Port.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Refer to Steps 1–5 to set the orderwire of NE2 and NE3. For the orderwire phone numbers of
NE2 and NE3, see Figure 2-10.

----End

2.19.2 Configuring the Orderwire of NE4


This topic describes how to configure the orderwire of NE4.

Prerequisite
l The NEs and boards must be created on the T2000.
l The orderwire board must be installed correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE4 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.
Step 2 Select NE4 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree.
Step 3 Click the General tab and see Figure 2-10 to set the following parameters:
l Call Waiting Time: 5
l Conference Call: 9999
l Phone 1: 1004

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

l Available Orderwire Port: 27-OSB4A-1, 10-SL1A-1

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click the Conference Call tab. Select 27-OSB4A-1 and 10-SL1A-1 into Selected Conference
Call Port.

Step 6 Click Apply.

----End

2.19.3 Configuring the Orderwire of NE5


This topic describes how to configure the orderwire of NE5 on the T2000.

Prerequisite
l The NEs and boards must be created on the T2000.
l The orderwire board must be installed correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE5 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.

Step 2 Select NE5 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree.

Step 3 Click the General tab and see Figure 2-10 to set the following parameters:
l Call Waiting Time: 5
l Conference Call: 9999
l Phone 1: 1005
l Available Orderwire Port: 27-OSB4A-1

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click the Conference Call tab. Select 27-OSB4A-1 into Selected Conference Call Port.

Step 6 Click Apply.

----End

2.20 Enabling/Disabling Performance Monitoring


This topic describes how to enable or disable the performance monitoring function on the T2000.
The performance parameters are used to monitor the equipment and analyze the network. This
topic describes how to enable or disable the performance monitoring function on the T2000.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

2-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Background Information
NOTE

Normally, all performance parameters are set to the default values. Hence, you only need to start the
performance monitoring. You can also set the performance parameters according to the requirements.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Select NE1 to NE5 from the Object Tree and click .

Step 3 Set Synchronous Mode of each NE to NM.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Select NE1 to NE5 and right-click to select Synchronize with NM Time. Click Yes in the dialog
box that is displayed.

Step 6 A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Step 7 Choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main Menu.

Step 8 Select NE1 and click . Set the parameters as follows:


l Set 15-Minute Monitoring: Enabled
l Set 24-Hour Monitoring: Enabled
l From: Set the parameters according to the requirements and make sure that the time is later
than the current time of the NM and NE.

Step 9 Click Apply.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 10 Refer to Steps 7–9 to set the performance parameters for NE2 and NE3.

----End

2.21 Setting Alarm Parameters


This topic describes how to set the alarm parameters on the T2000. To prevent the alarm data
from overflowing or to prevent damage to the alarm data, you need to dump the alarm data in
time.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

Normally, all alarm parameters except Dumping Condition are set to the default values. You can also set
alarm parameters depending on the actual situations. For details, see the alarm setting part in the OptiX
iManager T2OOO Help.
NOTE

It is recommended that you set all the alarm and performance parameters to the default values.

Background Information

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > Database > Dump Settings from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Select Alarm Data in the Dump Settings dialog box. If the record needs to be dumped
periodically, set Yes for Periodic dump. The default value is commonly used and can also be
set based on the actual conditions.

2-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

2.22 Configuring Automatic Laser Shutdown


The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) is performed before the output power of the laser
transmitter and the optical amplifier reaches a dangerous level. This topic considers the XCS4A
as an example to describe how to configure the ALS.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be a T2000 user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 Select 27-OSB4A from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Automatic Laser
Shutdown from the Function Tree. For a detailed description of the parameters for configuring
the ALS, refer to Table 2-8.

Step 3 Set the Automatic Shutdown parameter to Enabled. Set the other parameters to the default
values.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

Parameters
For a detailed description of the parameters for configuring the ALS, refer to Table 2-8.

Table 2-8 Parameters for configuring the ALS

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Automatic Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether to automatically


Shutdown Disabled shut down the laser. You can set
start time, shutdown time, and
constantly-on period only when
auto shutdown is set as Enabled.

On Period (ms) 0–655350 2000 Indicates the time to start the laser
automatically to test whether the
fiber is normal after the laser is shut
down.

Off Period (ms) 0–655350 60000 Indicates the time for auto laser
shutdown.

Continuously 0–655350 90000 Indicates the time to start the laser


On-Test Period manually to test whether the fiber is
(ms) normal after the laser is shut down.

2.23 Backing Up the NE Configuration Data


This topic describes how to back up the NE configuration data on the T2000. To prevent data
loss, back up the NE configuration data after the configuration is complete.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Precautions
NOTE

Ensure that no abnormal alarm or performance event exists before backing up the NE database.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu.

2-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

Step 2 Select NE1 to NE5 from the Object Tree on the left and click .

Step 3 Select the records of NE1–NE5 and choose Back Up NE Database > Back Up to SCC. Click
OK in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 4 A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the backup is successful. Click Close.

----End

2.24 Backing Up the T2000 Configuration Data


To prevent data loss, back up the T2000 configuration data after the configuration is complete.
This topic describes the immediate data backup and the periodic data backup on the T2000.
2.24.1 Immediate Backup
This topic describes how to back up the T2000 configuration data immediately on the T2000.
2.24.2 Periodic Backup
This topic describes how to back up the T2000 configuration data periodically on the T2000.

2.24.1 Immediate Backup


This topic describes how to back up the T2000 configuration data immediately on the T2000.

Prerequisite
l After configuration, check whether there are any alarms or performance events before
performing the following operations.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

The default password of the T2000 superuser admin is T2000. The superuser should be modified after the
T2000 system is installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Choose File > Log Out from the Main Menu. In the dialog box that is displayed,
click OK.

Step 2 Optional: Enter the user information in the Login interface.


l User Name: admin
l Password: T2000
NOTE

Steps 1 and 2 are optional. If the login user is already admin, start with Step 3.

Step 3 Choose System > NMS Security Settings > Single User Mode from the Main Menu. In the
dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Configuration Guide

CAUTION
When Single User Mode is chosen, the users other than admin are forcibly logged out.

Step 4 Choose System > Database > Database Backup from the Main Menu. Click Backup and the
system backs up the NM database to the appointed directory immediately.

----End

2.24.2 Periodic Backup


This topic describes how to back up the T2000 configuration data periodically on the T2000.

Prerequisite
l After the configuration, check whether any abnormal alarms or performance events are
generated before performing the following operations.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

The default password of the T2000 superuser admin is T2000. The password of the superuser should be
modified after the T2000 system is installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Choose File > Log Out from the Main Menu. In the dialog box displayed, click
OK.
Step 2 Optional: Enter the following user information in the Login interface:
l User Name: admin
l Password: T2000
NOTE

Steps 1 and 2 are optional. If the login user is already admin, start with Step 3.

Step 3 Choose System > NE Security Management > NE User Management from the Main Menu.
In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

2-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services

CAUTION
When Single User Mode is chosen, the users other than admin are forcibly logged out.

Step 4 Choose System > Schedule Task Management from the Main Menu. In the dialog box that is
displayed, click OK.
Step 5 Click New. Choose Task Type and set Task Name to Backup periodically in the Task
Creation Wizard dialog box.
Step 6 Click Next and confirm the backup directory on the server side. Then, click Next.
Step 7 Set running period to Weekly and click Next.

Step 8 Click Finish. Then, the system backs up the T2000 database to the appointed directory
periodically according to the backup period.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes

3 Configuring Services in Different Protection


Schemes

About This Chapter

This topic describes the service configuration methods in different protection schemes. It also
describes the service configuration of an SNCP ring with non-protection chains and the service
configuration of an SNCP ring with 1:1 linear MSP chains. After you are familiar with the
concepts, you can create a protection subnet quickly and correctly.

NOTE

For the configuration of an MSP ring and 1+1 linear MSP chain, see 2.13 Configuring Protection.

3.1 Networking Diagram


This topic describes the network architecture and the timeslot allocation.
3.2 Information of Boards on Each NE
This topic describes the information of boards on each NE.
3.3 SNCP Ring with Non-Protection Chains
This topic describes how to configure a protection subnet, which is an SNCP ring with non-
protection chains.
3.4 SNCP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chains
A 1:1 linear MSP chain is different from a non-protection chain, and requires that two fibers are
created on the T2000.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes Configuration Guide

3.1 Networking Diagram


This topic describes the network architecture and the timeslot allocation.

Figure 3-1 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 3-1 Networking diagram

NE1 (A)

T2000

NE2 (B) NE4 (D) STM-1 chain NE5 (E)


STM-4 two-fiber
directional ring

NE3 (C)

Figure 3-2 shows the timeslot allocation between NEs.

Figure 3-2 Timeslot allocation diagram


Ring
Station
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1
Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

VC12:1-12
1#VC4 t4:1-12

Line

Station NE4 NE5


Timeslot 10-SL1A-1 27-OSB1A-1

VC12:1-12
t4:1-12
1#VC4

Forward

Add/Drop

3.2 Information of Boards on Each NE


This topic describes the information of boards on each NE.

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes

Figure 3-3 shows the board layout of NE1. Figure 3-4 shows the board layout of NE2 and NE3.
Figure 3-5 shows the board layout of NE4. Figure 3-6 shows the board layout of NE5.

Figure 3-3 Board layout of NE1


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S P
C I
X X
T T P P P C U A
C C
7 7 T T T U
S S
5 5 1 1 1 X
S P
4 4 P
S S
C I
A A
C U

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Figure 3-4 Board layout of NE2 and NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S P
C I
X X
T P C U A
C C
A T U
S S
1 1 X
S P
4 4
C I
A A
C U

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Figure 3-5 Board layout of NE4


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S P
C I
X X S S
T P C U A
C C L L
A T U
S S 1 1
1 1 X
S P
4 4 A A
C I
A A
C U

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes Configuration Guide

Figure 3-6 Board layout of NE5


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S P
C I
X X
T P C U A
C C
A T U
S S
1 1 X
S P
1 1
C I
A A
C U

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

3.3 SNCP Ring with Non-Protection Chains


This topic describes how to configure a protection subnet, which is an SNCP ring with non-
protection chains.

If NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4 described in 2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services form an SNCP
ring, you need not configure the protection subnet for the ring before you configure the SDH
services.
3.3.1 Configuring a Non-Protection Chain
This topic describes how to configure a non-protection chain.
3.3.2 Configuring SNCP Services
This topic describes how to configure the SNCP services.

3.3.1 Configuring a Non-Protection Chain


This topic describes how to configure a non-protection chain.

Prerequisite
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual topology.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > Create SDH Protection Subnet > NP Chain from the Main
Menu. Then, Wizard for Creating Chain Without Protection is displayed.

Step 2 Set the following parameters in the Wizard for Creating Chain Without Protection dialog
box:
l Name: NP_Chain_1
l Level: STM-1

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes

Step 3 Double-click the icons of NE4 and NE5. Then, the NEs are added into the protection subnet.
Then, click Next.

Step 4 Confirm Physical Link Information and click Finish.

Step 5 A dialog box is displayed indicating that the protection subnet is successfully created. Click
Close.

----End

3.3.2 Configuring SNCP Services


This topic describes how to configure the SNCP services.

Prerequisite
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual topology.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 To configure the services on NE3, do as follows:
1. Right-click the NE3 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu.
2. Select NE3 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
3. See Figure 3-2 and configure the SNCP services from NE3 to NE5 to be dually fed from
NE3. Click Create SNCP Service. Set the following parameters in the Create SNCP
Service dialog box:
l Service Type: SNCP
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Level: VC12
l Revertive Mode: Non-Revertive
l Source Slot (for the working service): 28-OSB4A-1 (SDH-1)
l Source Timeslot Range (for the working service): 1–12
l Source Slot (for the protection service): 27-OSB4A-1 (SDH-1)
l Source Timeslot Range (for the protection service): 1–12
l Sink Slot: 4-PT1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Set the other parameters to the default values.
4. Select the Activate Immediately check box and click OK.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes Configuration Guide

Step 2 To configure the services on NE2, do as follows:


1. Right-click the NE2 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu.
2. Select NE2 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
3. According to Figure 3-2, configure the E1 service from NE3 to NE5 that passes through
NE2: from timeslots 1–12 of the first VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface board to
timeslots 1-12 of the first VC-4 on the 28-OSB4A optical interface board. Click Create.
Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A -1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Activate Immediately: Yes
4. Click OK.

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes

Step 3 To configure the services on NE1, do as follows:


NOTE

Service configuration on NE1 is the same as the service configuration on NE2. You can refer to
"Configuring Services on NE2" in this topic.

Step 4 To configure the services on NE4, do as follows:


1. Right-click the NE4 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu.
2. Select NE4 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
3. See Figure 3-2 and configure the SNCP services from NE3 to NE5 to be selectively
received at NE4. Click Create SNCP Service. Set the following parameters in the Create
SNCP Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Revertive Mode: Non-Revertive
l Source Slot (for the working service): 27-OSB4A-1 (SDH-1)
l Source Timeslot Range (for the working service): 1–12
l Source Slot (for the protection service): 28-OSB4A-1 (SDH-1)
l Source Timeslot Range (for the protection service): 1–12
l Sink Slot: 10-SL1A(SDH-1)
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
4. Select the Activate Immediately check box and click OK.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes Configuration Guide

Step 5 To configure the services on NE5, do as follows:


1. Right-click the NE5 icon on the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu.
2. Select NE5 in the upper left pane and choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
3. According to Figure 3-2, create the E1 services from NE3 to NE5: from timeslots 1–12 in
the first VC-4 of the 27-OSB1A optical interface board to timeslots 1–12 of the first VC-4
on the 4-PT1 board. Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH
Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 27-OSB1A-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Sink Slot: 4-PT1
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6): 1–12
l Activate Immediately: Yes
4. Click OK.

----End

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes

3.4 SNCP Ring with 1:1 Linear MSP Chains


A 1:1 linear MSP chain is different from a non-protection chain, and requires that two fibers are
created on the T2000.

This topic describes the differences in terms of service configuration between an SNCP ring
with 1:1 linear MSP chains and an SNCP ring with non-protection chains (described in 3.3 SNCP
Ring with Non-Protection Chains).

Table 3-1 provides the fiber/cable connection relations between NE4 and NE5.

Table 3-1 Fiber/Cable connection between NE4 and NE5

Fiber/ NE-Slot-Board NE-Slot-Board


Cable

1 NE4-10-SL1A NE5-27-OSB1A

2 NE4-11-SL1A NE5-28-OSB1A

3.4.1 Configuring a 1:1 Linear MSP Subnet


This topic describes how to create 1:1 linear MSP.
3.4.2 Configuring SNCP Services
This topic describes how to configure SNCP services.

3.4.1 Configuring a 1:1 Linear MSP Subnet


This topic describes how to create 1:1 linear MSP.

Prerequisite
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual topology.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > Create SDH Protection Subnet > M:N linear MSP from the
Main Menu. Then, the Wizard for Creating M:N Linear MSP Chain dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Set the following parameters in the Wizard for Creating M:N Linear MSP Chain dialog box:
l Name: 1:N_MSP_1
l Level: STM-1

Step 3 Double-click the icons of NE4 and NE5. Then, the NEs are added into the protection subnet.
Then, click Next.

Step 4 Confirm Physical Link Information and click Finish.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
3 Configuring Services in Different Protection Schemes Configuration Guide

Step 5 A dialog box is displayed indicating that the protection subnet is successfully created. Click
Close.

----End

3.4.2 Configuring SNCP Services


This topic describes how to configure SNCP services.
The SNCP service configuration is the same as the service configuration described in 3.3.2
Configuring SNCP Services.

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4 Configuring Ethernet Services

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to configure Ethernet private line (EPL), Ethernet private local area
network (EPLAN), Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), and Ethernet virtual private local area
network (EVPLAN) services on the T2000. This topic also describes the related engineering
requirements and engineering information.
Table 4-1 lists the Ethernet services that are supported by Ethernet boards of the OptiX OSN
2000.

Table 4-1 Mapping relation between Ethernet boards and Ethernet services
Item EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN

EFT0 Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

EFT8A Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

EFT8B Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported

EMS1 Supported Supported Supported Supported

4.1 Configuring Transparent Transmission EPL Services by Using the Per-NE Configuration
Function
The transparent transmission EPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that
cannot share the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the transparent transmission EPL services
on the T2000 by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This
topic describes how to configure the point-to-point EPL services by using the per-NE
configuration function.
4.2 Configuring Transparent Transmission EPL Services by Using the Trail Function
The point-to-point EPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that cannot share
the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the transparent transmission EPL services on the T2000
by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topic describes
how to configure the transparent transmission EPL services by using the trail function. The trail
function cannot be used to configure end-to-end services.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.3 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function
The PORT-shared EVPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that cannot
share the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the PORT-shared EVPL services on the T2000
by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topic describes
how to configure the PORT-shared EVPL services by using the per-NE configuration function.
4.4 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services by Using the Trail Function
The PORT-shared EVPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that cannot
share the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the PORT-shared EVPL services on the T2000
by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topicdescribes
how to configure the PORT-shared EVPL services by using the trail function. The trail function
cannot be used to configure end-to-end services.
4.5 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services by Using the Per-NE Configuration
Function
The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that share
the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services on the T2000
by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topic describes
how to configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services by using the per-NE configuration
function.
4.6 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services by Using the Trail Function
The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that share
the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services on the T2000
by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topicdescribes
how to configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services by using the trail function.
4.7 Configuring the Ingress/Egress EVPL Services by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function
When the data of multiple users is transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, the ingress/egress EVPL
service is used to isolate the data by using the VLAN ID and MPLS labels. You can configure
the ingress/egress EVPL service on the T2000 by using the per-NE configuration function.
4.8 Configuring the Transit EVPL Service by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function
The EVPL services of different users can share the same VCTRUNK, where switching of the
MPLS labels ensures the interworking between the MPLS networks. You can configure the
transit EVPL service on the T2000 by using the per-NE configuration function.
4.9 Configuring the 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Service by Using the Per-NE Configuration
Function
The EPLAN service implements the dynamic sharing of the Ethernet service bandwidth between
multiple points, thus meeting the requirements of the dynamic features of the data services and
saving the bandwidth resources. You can configure the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN service on
the T2000 by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topic
describes how to configure the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN service by using the single station
function.
4.10 Configuring the 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Service by Using the Per-NE
Configuration Function
The EVPLAN service implements the dynamic sharing of the Ethernet service bandwidth
between multiple points, thus meeting the requirements of the dynamic features of the data
services and saving the bandwidth resources. You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based
EVPLAN service on the T2000 by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration
function. This topic describes how to configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN service by
using the per-NE configuration function.
4.11 Configuring the 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Service by Using the Trail Function
The EVPLAN service implements the dynamic sharing of the Ethernet service bandwidth
between multiple points, thus meeting the requirements of the dynamic features of the data

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

services and saving the bandwidth resources. You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based
EVPLAN service on the T2000 by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration
function. This topicdescribes how to configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN service by
using the trail function.
4.12 Configuring the MPLS-Based EVPLAN Service by Using the Per-NE Configuration
Function
The EVPLAN service uses the MPLS technology. The transmission efficiency is lower than the
transmission efficiency of the EPLAN service and the configuration is more complex. Therefore,
the EPLAN is recommended unless EVPLAN needs to be used to meet certain special
requirements. You can configure the MPLS-based EVPLAN service on the T2000 by using the
per-NE configuration function.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.1 Configuring Transparent Transmission EPL Services by


Using the Per-NE Configuration Function
The transparent transmission EPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that
cannot share the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the transparent transmission EPL services
on the T2000 by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This
topic describes how to configure the point-to-point EPL services by using the per-NE
configuration function.
4.1.1 Engineering Requirements
The completely isolated data services of two companies at a station must be transported to
another station through the multi-service transport platform (MSTP) equipment.
4.1.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the preceding requirements and
the engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the engineering information
mentioned in This topic.
4.1.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure transparent transmission EPL services on the T2000, by
using the per-NE configuration function.
4.1.4 Creating a Board
Ethernet boards need to be added to the NE based on the type and volume of the service. This
topic describes how to create a board.
4.1.5 Configuring the Data of NE1
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.
4.1.6 Configuring the Data of NE2
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.
4.1.7 Configuring the Data of NE3
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

4.1.1 Engineering Requirements


The completely isolated data services of two companies at a station must be transported to
another station through the multi-service transport platform (MSTP) equipment.
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added. The requirements for
the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
l The two companies A and B at NE1 must transmit data services to NE3 through the MSTP
equipment.
l The services of companies A and B must be isolated completely.
l Company A requires a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth, and company B requires a 20 Mbit/s
bandwidth.
l The equipment of companies A and B provides the 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet
electrical ports for the interconnection with the MSTP.

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4.1.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the preceding requirements and
the engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the engineering information
mentioned in This topic.
l Networking diagram
l Board layout of each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-1 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

Figure 4-1 Ethernet service networking and port allocation


A B

PORT1 PORT2

T2000

NE1
STM-1 linear MSP
chain
NE2 STM-4 two-fiber
NE4
bidirectional MSP ring

NE3

PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK

A B

Board Information of Each NE


The Ethernet boards should be added to the NEs according to the service type and traffic volume
of the new service. NE1 and NE3 need to be added with one EFT0 and one ETFS8. Figure
4-2 shows the board layout of NE1. Figure 4-3 shows the board layout of NE3.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-2 Board layout of NE1


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C F T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S T 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 0 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Figure 4-3 Board layout of NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C F T U
1 1 S S T F X
4 4 S
0 PIU
A A
8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-4 shows the service configuration diagram of NE1 and NE3.

Figure 4-4 Service configuration diagram

PORT VCTRUNK VCTRUNK PORT

PORT1 PORT1
A A
10 Mbit/s VCTRUNK1 SDH VCTRUNK1 10 Mbit/s
VC4-2: VC12-1 to VC4-2: VC12-1 to
PORT2 VC12-5 VC12-5 PORT2
B VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 B
20 Mbit/s 20 Mbit/s
VC4-2: VC12-6 to VC4-2: VC12-6 to
VC12-15 VC12-15

NE1
NE3

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

NOTE

l On the EFT0, only VC4-2 can bind VC-12 paths and VC4-1 to VC4-2 can bind VC-3 paths.
l One VC-4 can be used to bind paths of only the VC-12 or VC-3 level.

Table 4-2 lists the mapping relation of Ethernet service connection.

Table 4-2 Ethernet service connection

Item A B

NE NE1

Slot-board-port 9-EFT0-1 9-EFT0-2

Timeslot VC4-2: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-2: VC12-6–VC12-15

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 10xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EFT0-1 9-EFT0-2

Timeslot VC4-2: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-2: VC12-6–VC12-15

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 10xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 4-5 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.

Figure 4-5 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1

Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC12:1-15
2#VC4
9-EFT0:VC4-2: 9-EFT0:VC4-2:
VC12:1-15 VC12:1-15

Add/Drop

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.1.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure transparent transmission EPL services on the T2000, by
using the per-NE configuration function.
NOTE

This topic describes the procedures and precautions for configuring Ethernet services on the T2000. For
details, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Operation Guide for SDH.

Table 4-3 lists the procedures for configuring the point-to-point transparent transmission EPL
service for the EFT0 board on the T2000.

Table 4-3 Process of point-to-point transparent transmission EPL service configuration


Procedur Operation Remarks
e

1 Creating a board Required

2 Configuring port attributes of the Ethernet board and Required


bound paths

3 Configuring the transparent transmission EPL In the case of the


service Ethernet transparent
transmission board
EFT0/EFT8A/EFT8B,
the T2000 automatically
creates the EPL service.
In the case of the
Ethernet switching
board EMS1 board, you
need to create the EPL
service manually.

4 Creating a cross-connection between the Ethernet Required


board and the line board

4.1.4 Creating a Board


Ethernet boards need to be added to the NE based on the type and volume of the service. This
topic describes how to create a board.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Precautions
NOTE

You can also configure the EMS1 boards on the NE to transparently transmit EPL services. Note the
following items when configuring transparent transmission EPL services:
l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the Ethernet interface
board.
l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only. VCTRUNK13 to VCTRUNK24 can
be bound with VC4-2 only.
l Paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2. But paths at only one of the two levels
can be bound in a VC-4.
l Set Entry Detection of the internal port and external port to Disabled.

l Configure EPL services manually to create the mapping relation between PORTs and VCTRUNKs.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, double-click the NE1 icon. Then, the NE panel is displayed.

Step 2 Right-click slot 09 according to the board layout shown in Figure 4-2 and select EFT0 from
the shortcut menu. Right-click slot 16 and select ETFS8 from the shortcut menu.

Step 3 Make sure that the EFT0 board is configured in slot 9 and the EFT8 board is configured in slot
16. Click to exit the NE panel diagram.

Step 4 Refer to Steps 1–3 to create the Ethernet board of NE3. Figure 4-3 shows the board layout of
NE3.

----End

4.1.5 Configuring the Data of NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Precautions
NOTE

On the EFT0 board, only PORT5 to PORT8 support Jumbo frames whose maximum frame length is 9600
bytes. PORT1 to PORT4 support only frames whose maximum frame length is 6154 bytes.
NOTE

The EFT0 supports three mapping protocols: GFP, LAPD and HDLC. The EMS1 supports only one
mapping protocol: GFP. Currently, the GFP is the mainstream mapping mode. Hence, set the mapping
protocol to GFP unless another protocol is specified. The mapping protocol at the local NE must be the
same as the mapping protocol at the opposite NE.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EFT0 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface . Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT1 and PORT2
as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.

4. Click Apply.

Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports as follows:


1. Choose Internal Port > Encapsulation/Mapping and set the parameters as follows:
l Mapping Protocol: GFP (recommended)
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click the LCAS tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
NOTE

To use the LCAS function, you must set the equipment at both ends to the same LCAS mode.
l If Huawei equipment is used at the local and the opposite stations, select Huawei Mode.
l If Huawei equipment interconnects with the equipment from other vendors, select Standard
Mode for the equipment at the local and opposite ends.
l If the equipment from other vendors does not support Standard Mode, select Huawei Mode.
4. Click Apply.

Step 3 Configure bound paths as follows:


1. In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To set bound paths for VCTRUNK1, set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Level: VC12-xv

4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Service Direction: Bidirectional


l Available Resources: VC4-2

l Select VC12-1–VC12-5 in Available Timeslots. Click .


4. To set a bound path for VCTRUNK2, set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Level: VC12-xv
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-2

l Select VC12-6–VC12-15 in Available Timeslots. Click .


5. Click OK.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE1 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. See Figure 4-5 and set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EFT0-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-2
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–15
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–15


l Activate Immediately: Yes

5. Click OK.

----End

Parameters

Table 4-4 Parameters of basic attributes


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Enabled/ Enabled, Disabled Specifies the enabled or disabled


Disabled Disabled state of the port. "Enabled" means
that this port is allowed to access the
services. "Disabled" means that this
port is not allowed to access the
services.

4-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Working Mode Auto- Auto- The auto-negotiation mode is


Negotiation, Negotiation recommended, because it can
10M Half- automatically detect the best
Duplex, 10M working mode to combine a port
Full-Duplex, and its interconnected port. Hence it
100M Full- facilitates maintenance.
Duplex, 100M During the configuration, make
Half-Duplex, sure that the working modes of the
1000M Half- connected ports are the same. If the
Duplex, 1000M working modes are different, the
Full-Duplex services are unavailable.

Maximum l 1518–1535 1522 l This parameter should be larger


Frame Length (EFT0/ than the maximum frame length
EFT8A/ of the data frame to be
EFT8B) transmitted.
l 1518–9600 l In the case of the EFT0/EFT8A/
(EMS1) EFT8B board, this parameter is
invalid. For JUMBO frames. In
the case of the EMS1 board, this
parameter has a restriction on
JUMBO frames.
l If JUMBO frames need not be
considered, it is recommended
that you adopt the default value
for this parameter when the
accessed services are the
Ethernet frames that have the
layer 1 VLAN labels or do not
have the VLAN label.

MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, Non-Loopback Specifies the loopback state at the


Inloop MAC layer.

PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, Non-Loopback Specifies the loopback state at the


Inloop PHY layer.

Table 4-5 Parameters for configuring the bound paths


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Configurable VCTRUNKn VCTRUNK1 You need to select the value


Ports according to the actual service
requirement.

Level VC3-xv, VC4- - Indicates the level of VCTRUNK-


xv, VC12-xv bound path.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Direction Bidirectional, Bidirectional Indicates the direction of the


Uplink, service.
Downlink

Available - - Indicates the available paths.


Resources

Available - - Indicates the available timeslots.


Timeslots

4.1.6 Configuring the Data of NE2


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPL function. In addition, they must be inserted in
the correct slots.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE2 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 3 According to Figure 4-5, configure the service from NE1 to NE3 that passes through NE2: from
timeslots 1–52 of the first VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface board to timeslots 1-52 of
the first VC-4 on the 28-OSB4A optical interface board.
Step 4 Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-2
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1-15
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1-15
l Activate Immediately: Yes

4-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

4.1.7 Configuring the Data of NE3


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Ethernet ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE3 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

2. Select 9-EFT0 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface . Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT1 and PORT2
as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Choose Internal Port > Encapsulation/Mapping and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1
and VCTRUNK2 as follows:
l Mapping Protocol: GFP (recommended)
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click the LCAS tab and set the parameters as follows:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
8. Click Apply.

Step 2 Configure bound paths as follows:


1. In the Internal Port page, select the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configure, and the bound path configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters In the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-2

l Select VC12-1–VC12-5 in Available Timeslots. Click .


4. To set a bound path for VCTRUNK2, set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-2

l Select VC12-6–VC12-15 in Available Timeslots. Click .


5. Click OK.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE3 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

4-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. See Figure 4-5 and set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EFT0-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-2
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–15
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–15
l Activate Immediately: Yes
5. Click OK.

----End

4.2 Configuring Transparent Transmission EPL Services by


Using the Trail Function
The point-to-point EPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that cannot share
the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the transparent transmission EPL services on the T2000
by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topic describes
how to configure the transparent transmission EPL services by using the trail function. The trail
function cannot be used to configure end-to-end services.
NOTE

l This topic describes the procedures and precautions for configuring Ethernet services on the T2000.
For details, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Operation Guide for SDH.

4.2.1 Engineering Requirements


The completely isolated data services of two companies at a station must be transported to
another station through the multi-service transport platform (MSTP) equipment.
4.2.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the preceding requirements and
the engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the engineering information
mentioned in This topic.
4.2.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission EPL services by using the
trail function on the T2000.
4.2.4 Creating a Trunk Link
This topic describes how to create a trunk link when a point-to-point EPL service is configured
by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.
4.2.5 Creating an EPL Trail
This topic describes how to create an EPL trail when a point-to-point EPL service is configured
by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.2.1 Engineering Requirements


The completely isolated data services of two companies at a station must be transported to
another station through the multi-service transport platform (MSTP) equipment.
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added. The requirements for
the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
l The two companies A and B at NE1 must transmit data services to NE3 through the MSTP
equipment.
l The services of companies A and B must be isolated completely.
l Company A requires a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth, and company B requires a 20 Mbit/s
bandwidth.
l The equipment of companies A and B provides the 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet
electrical ports for the interconnection with the MSTP.

4.2.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the preceding requirements and
the engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the engineering information
mentioned in This topic.
l Networking diagram
l Board layout of each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-6 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

4-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-6 Ethernet service networking and port allocation


A B

PORT1 PORT2

T2000

NE1
STM-1 linear MSP
chain
NE2 STM-4 two-fiber
NE4
bidirectional MSP ring

NE3

PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK

A B

Board Information of Each NE


The Ethernet boards should be added to the NEs according to the service type and traffic volume
of the new service. NE1 and NE3 need to be added with one EFT0 and one ETFS8. Figure
4-7 shows the board layout of NE1. Figure 4-8 shows the board layout of NE3.

Figure 4-7 Board layout of NE1


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C F T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S T 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 0 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-8 Board layout of NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C F T U
1 1 S S T F X
4 4 S
0 PIU
A A
8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-9 shows the service configuration diagram of NE1 and NE3.

Figure 4-9 Service configuration diagram

PORT VCTRUNK VCTRUNK PORT

PORT1 PORT1
A A
10 Mbit/s VCTRUNK1 SDH VCTRUNK1 10 Mbit/s
VC4-2: VC12-1 to VC4-2: VC12-1 to
PORT2 VC12-5 VC12-5 PORT2
B VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 B
20 Mbit/s 20 Mbit/s
VC4-2: VC12-6 to VC4-2: VC12-6 to
VC12-15 VC12-15

NE1
NE3

NOTE

l On the EFT0, only VC4-2 can bind VC-12 paths and VC4-1 to VC4-2 can bind VC-3 paths.
l One VC-4 can be used to bind paths of only the VC-12 or VC-3 level.

Table 4-6 lists the mapping relation of Ethernet service connection.

Table 4-6 Ethernet service connection

Item A B

NE NE1

Slot-board-port 9-EFT0-1 9-EFT0-2

Timeslot VC4-2: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-2: VC12-6–VC12-15

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 10xVC-12

4-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Item A B

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EFT0-1 9-EFT0-2

Timeslot VC4-2: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-2: VC12-6–VC12-15

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 10xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 4-10 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.

Figure 4-10 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1

Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC12:1-15
2#VC4
9-EFT0:VC4-2: 9-EFT0:VC4-2:
VC12:1-15 VC12:1-15

Add/Drop

4.2.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission EPL services by using the
trail function on the T2000.
NOTE

Ethernet service can be created by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function.
If you purchase the license with trail function, you can create Ethernet service by using the trail function.
Otherwise, you can create Ethernet service only by using the per-NE configuration function.

Table 4-7 provides the process of creating the point-to-point transparent transmission EPL
service by using the trail function on the T2000.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Table 4-7 Process of configuring point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services (by trail)
Proce Operation Remarks
dure

1 Creating a server trail See 2.15.1 Creating a VC-4 Server Trail.

2 Creating a trunk link -

3 Creating an EPL trail -

4.2.4 Creating a Trunk Link


This topic describes how to create a trunk link when a point-to-point EPL service is configured
by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The license that supports the trial function must be available.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > Trunk Link Creation from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Set Bandwidth to 5xVC12 in the Trunk Link Creation interface.
Step 3 Click Browse. Select the source NE (NE1). Select the EFT8 board, then select 1 for VCTRUNK
Port, and then select VC4:2-VC12(1)–VC4:2-VC12(5) for Available Timeslot. Click OK.
Step 4 Click Browse. Select the source NE (NE3). Select the EFT8 board, then select 1 for VCTRUNK
Port, and then select VC4:2-VC12(1)–VC4:2-VC12(5) for Available Timeslot. Click OK.
Step 5 Select the Activate the trail check box, and adopt default settings for other parameters.
Step 6 Click Apply to create the trunk link from NE1 to NE3 of user A.

4-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Step 7 Refer to Steps 2–6 to create the trunk link from NE1 to NE3 of user B.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameters

Table 4-8 Parameters for creating a trunk link

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Bandwidth l EFT0/EFT8A/ 1xVC-12 Determines the


EFT8B: nxVC-12 bandwidth of the
(n: 1–63), nxVC-3 trunk link. Note that
(n: 1–6), nxVC-4 the bandwidth should
(n:1, 2) be consistent with the
l EMS1: nxVC-12 bandwidth of the
(n: 1–126), selected server trail
nxVC-3 (n: 1–6), or the bound
nxVC-4 (n:1, 2) timeslot.

Source NE-slot-board- - Indicates the source


VCTRUNKn port, where "n" is the
port number.

Bound timeslot Port-VC4-n-VC12/ - Indicates the timeslot


VC3-m that is bound with the
source/sink
VCTRUNK port,
where "n" is the
VC-4 path number
and "m" is the
VC-12/VC-3 path
number. Note that the
bandwidth of the
timeslot bound with
the source port,
bandwidth of the
timeslot bound with
the sink port, and the
bandwidth must be
consistent.

Sink NE-slot-board- - Indicates the sink


VCTRUNKn port, where "n" is the
port number.

4.2.5 Creating an EPL Trail


This topic describes how to create an EPL trail when a point-to-point EPL service is configured
by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.

4-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l The license that supports the trial function must be available.


l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l The trunk link must be created on the T2000.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > Ethernet Trail Creation > EPL Creation from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Set the following parameters regarding the service source in the window that is displayed:
l Port Usage Strategy: Port
l Click Browse. Select NE1 and select a proper source line port PORT1.

Step 3 Set parameters regarding the sink as follows:


l Port Usage Strategy: Port
l Click Browse. Select NE3 and select a proper source line port PORT1.

Step 4 Select Use Existing Trunk Links in Trunk Link Route Strategy. Select Trunk_Link-0001
with a bandwidth of 5xVC-12.

Step 5 Click Next. Set the port attributes of NE1 and NE3 in the window that is displayed:
l Port Enabled for PORT1: Enabled
l Enabling LCAS for VCTRUNK1: Enabled

Step 6 Click Finish.

Step 7 Refer to Steps 2–6 to create the EPL service from NE1 to NE3 of user B.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameters

Table 4-9 Parameters for creating an EPL trail


Parameter Value Default Description
Range Value

Port Usage Port, Port - Indicates the usage strategy of the source/sink
Strategy +VLAN port. When This parameter is set to Port, it
indicates that the source/sink is identified
only by the external physical port number and
is used for transparent transmission. When
this parameter is set to Port+VLAN, it
indicates that the source/sink is identified
only by the external physical port number +
VLAN and is used for convergent
transmission.

Trunk Link Use Existing Use Existing It is recommended that you adopt the
Route Trunk Link, Trunk Link following procedures to create the EPL
Strategy Manually service by using the trail function: creating
Create Trunk the server trail→creating the trunk link trail
Link, →creating the EPL trail. In this case, select
Automaticall Use Existing Trunk Link.
y Create Alternatively, you can create the trunk Link
Trunk Link trail when creating the EPL trail. In this case,
you should select Manually Create Trunk
Link or Automatically Create Trunk
Link.

4.3 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services by Using the


Per-NE Configuration Function
The PORT-shared EVPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that cannot
share the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the PORT-shared EVPL services on the T2000
by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topic describes
how to configure the PORT-shared EVPL services by using the per-NE configuration function.
4.3.1 Engineering Requirements
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added. The requirements for
the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
4.3.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements and the
engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the following engineering
information.
4.3.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the PORT-shared EVPL service by using the per-NE
configuration function on the T2000.
4.3.4 Configuring the Data of NE1

4-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.
4.3.5 Configuring the Data of NE2
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.
4.3.6 Configuring the Data of NE3
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

4.3.1 Engineering Requirements


In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added. The requirements for
the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
l The headquarters of company C located at NE1 must transmit data services to the two
branches (C1 and C2) located at NE3 through the MSTP equipment.
l The services of the two branches must be isolated completely.
l Branch C1 requires a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth, and branch C2 requires a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The Ethernet switch of company C must provide the 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet
electrical ports that support VLAN.

4.3.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements and the
engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the following engineering
information.
l Networking diagram
l Board layout of each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-11 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-11 Ethernet service networking and port allocation


Headquarters of A

PORT2

T2000

NE1
STM-1 linear MSP
chain
STM-4 two-fiber
NE2 bidirectional MSP ring NE4

NE3

PORT2 PORT3 VCTRUNK

C1 C2

Board Information of Each NE


Based on the service type and the traffic volume, one EMS1 and one ETFS8 board are added to
NE1 and NE3. Other NEs require no new boards. Figure 4-12 shows the board information of
NE1. Figure 4-13 shows the board information of NE3.

Figure 4-12 Board layout of NE1


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C M T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S S 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 1 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

4-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-13 Board layout of NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U
1 1 S S S F X
S
4 4 S
1 C PIU
A A
C 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-14 shows the service configuration diagram of NE1 and NE3.

Figure 4-14 Service configuration diagram

PORT VCTRUNK VCTRUNK PORT

PORT2
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 C1
C
PORT2
VC4-1: VC12-1 to
SDH VC4-1: VC12-1 to
10 Mbit/s
VC12-5 VC12-5 PORT3
C2
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 20 Mbit/s
VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC4-1: VC12-6 to
VC12-15 VC12-15

NE1
NE3

Table 4-10 lists the mapping relation of Ethernet service connection.

Table 4-10 Ethernet service connection

Item C1 C2

NE NE1

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-15

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 10xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of the source port Tag aware

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Item C1 C2

Source VLAN ID 100 200

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-15

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 10xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of the sink port Access Access

VLAN ID 100 200

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


The SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services is as shown in Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15 SDH timeslot allocation diagram


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1

Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC12:1-15
2#VC4 9-EMS1:VC4-1: 9-EMS1:VC4-1:
VC12:1-15 VC12:1-15

Add/Drop

NOTE

l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the ETFS8 board.
l On the EMS1, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only and VCTRUNK13 to
VCTRUNK24 can be bound with VC4-2 only.
l On the EMS1, paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2, but paths at only one
of the two levels can be bound in a VC-4.

4.3.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the PORT-shared EVPL service by using the per-NE
configuration function on the T2000.
Table 4-11 lists the process of configuring the PORT-shared Ethernet EPL service on the T2000.

4-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Table 4-11 Process of configuring the PORT-shared EPL service

Proce Operation Remarks


dure

1 Creating a board For details, see 4.1.4


Creating a Board.

2 Configuring port attributes of the Ethernet board and -


bound paths

3 Creating a cross-connection between the Ethernet -


board and the line board

4 Creating EPL services -

4.3.4 Configuring the Data of NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Precautions
NOTE

l See the T2000 online Help for the meaning of each parameter.
l To use the LCAS function, you must set the equipment at both ends to the same LCAS mode.
l If Huawei equipment is used at the local and the opposite stations, select Huawei Mode.
l If Huawei equipment interconnects with the equipment from other vendors, select Standard
Mode for the equipment at the local and opposite ends.
l If the equipment from other vendors does not support Standard Mode, select Huawei Mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface . Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT2 as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l Maximum Frame Length: Set this parameter according to the connected Ethernet
equipment, and adopt the default value 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.

4. Click Apply.
5. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of PORT2 as follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled
6. Click Apply.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports as follows:
1. Choose Internal Port > Encapsulation/Mapping and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1
and VCTRUNK2 as follows:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.

2. Click Apply.
3. Click the LCAS tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled
4. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure bound paths as follows:
1. In the Internal Port page, select the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configure. Then, the Bound Path dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters In the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-1–VC12-5 in Available Timeslots. Click .

4-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4. To set a bound path for VCTRUNK2, set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Available timeslots: VC12-6 to VC12-7. Then click .


5. Click OK.
Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE1 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. See Figure 4-15 and set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–15
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–15
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

5. Click OK.
Step 5 Create the PORT-shared EPL service as follows:
1. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function
Tree.
3. Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
4. See Figure 4-14, and set the following parameters in the dialog box to create services from
C to C1:
l Service Type: EPL
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Source port: PORT2
l Source VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 100
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
l Sink VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 100

4-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

5. Click Apply.
6. See Figure 4-14, and repeat Step 4 to create the service from C to C2. Set the following
parameters in the dialog box:
l Service Type: EPL
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Source port: PORT2
l Source VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 200
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK2
l Sink VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 200
7. Click OK.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameters

Table 4-12 Parameters for tag attributes


Parameter Value Default Description
Range Value

TAG Tag Aware, Tag Aware The tag flag is used to set the type of data
Access, packets to be processed.
Hybrid l Tag Aware: The port of this attribute
transmits and receives the packets that
carry the VLAN tag. During the receiving
process, the port discards the packets that
do not carry the VLAN tag, but transmits
the packets that carry the VLAN tag. The
packets to be received and transmitted may
belong to different VLANs.
l Access: The port of this attribute transmits
and receives the packets that do not carry
the VLAN tag.
– It receives only the packets that do not
carry the VLAN tag, and adds Port
VLAN ID (PVID, which can be set) to
these packets.
– At the egress port, the VLAN tag is
stripped from the packets.
l Hybrid: The port of this attribute transmits
and receives the packets regardless of
whether the VLAN tag is carried.
– It transparently transmits the packets
that carry the VLAN tags. After
receiving the packets that do not carry
the VLAN tag, it adds Port VLAN ID
(PVID, which can be set) to these
packets.
– At the egress port, if the VLAN ID
carried in the packets is the same as the
PVID of the port, the VLAN Tag is
stripped. Otherwise, the packets are
transmitted transparently.

Entry Enabled, Enabled Indicates whether to identify the tag flags in


Detection Disabled the data packets. If Disabledis selected, the
tag flag is invalid. In this case, the port
transparently transmits the received data
packets.

Default 1–4095 1 Specifies the default VLAN ID of the port


VLAN ID when Access or Hybrid is selected for
TAG.

4-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parameter Value Default Description


Range Value

VLAN 0–7 0 Indicates the service quality level. For


Priority example, when the network is busy, the data
packets with higher VLAN priority are
transmitted first, and the data packets with
lower VLAN priority may be discarded. The
value 0 indicates the highest priority, and the
value 7 indicates the lowest priority.

Table 4-13 Parameters for configuring the EPL service (by station)
Parameter Value Default Description
Range Value

Board - - Indicates the board that needs to be


configured with the Ethernet service.

Service Type EPL EPL Indicates the type of the Ethernet service.
Transit
(MPLS)
EVPL
(MPLS)

Service Bidirectional Bidirectional Indicates the direction of the Ethernet service.


Direction ,
Unidirection
al

Source Port - PORT1 Indicates the source port of the Ethernet


service.

Source 1–4095 - Indicates the source VLAN ID of the Ethernet


VLAN service.

Sink Port - VCTRUNK Indicates the sink port of the Ethernet service.
1

Sink VLAN 1–4095 - Indicates the sink VLAN ID of the Ethernet


service.

Port Type PE, P PE On the boards that support the MPLS


function, the ports types may be PE and P.
The default value of this parameter is PE.

Encapsulatio MartinioE MartinioE When the port type is set to "P", this
n Format parameter can be set.
The MartinioE encapsulation uses two layers
of labels (Tunnel label and VC label) to
interconnect to other MPLS equipment.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value Default Description


Range Value

Enabled/ Enabled, Enabled Specifies the enabled or disabled state of the


Disabled Disabled port. "Enabled" means that this port is
allowed to access the services. "Disabled"
means that this port is not allowed to access
the services.

4.3.5 Configuring the Data of NE2


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE2 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 According to Figure 4-15, configure the service from NE1 to NE3 that passes through NE2:
from timeslots 1–15 of the second VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface board to timeslots
1-15 of the second VC-4 on the 28-OSB4A optical interface board.

Step 3 Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-2
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–15
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–15
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

4.3.6 Configuring the Data of NE3


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

4-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Ethernet ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE3 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface . Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT2 and PORT3
as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the TAG tab and set the attributes of PORT2 and PORT3 as follows:
l TAG: Access
l Default VLAN ID for PORT2: 100
l Default VLAN ID for PORT3: 200
l Entry Detection: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.

6. Click Apply.
7. Choose Internal Port > Encapsulation/Mapping and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1
and VCTRUNK2 as follows:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
8. Click Apply.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

9. Click the LCAS tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled
10. Click Apply.

Step 2 Configure bound paths as follows:


1. In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configure, and the bound path configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters in the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-1–VC12-5 in Available Timeslots. Click .


4. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK2, set the parameters as follows in the dialog box.
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-6–VC12-15 in Available Timeslots. Click .


5. Click OK.

Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE3 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. See Figure 4-15 and set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–15
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–15
l Activate Immediately: Yes
5. Click OK.

Step 4 Create the PORT-shared EPL service as follows:


1. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree.

4-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function
Tree.
3. Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
4. See Figure 4-14, and set the following parameters in the dialog box to create services from
C to C1:
l Service Type: EPL
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Source port: PORT2
l Source VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 100
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
l Sink VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 100
l TAG for VCTRUNK1: Access
5. Click Apply.
6. See Figure 4-14, and repeat Step 4 to create the service from C to C2. Set the following
parameters in the dialog box:
l Service Type: EPL
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Source port: PORT3
l Source VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 200
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK2
l Sink VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 200
l TAG for VCTRUNK2: Access
7. Click OK.

----End

4.4 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services by Using the


Trail Function
The PORT-shared EVPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that cannot
share the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the PORT-shared EVPL services on the T2000
by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topicdescribes
how to configure the PORT-shared EVPL services by using the trail function. The trail function
cannot be used to configure end-to-end services.
4.4.1 Engineering Requirements
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added. The requirements for
the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
4.4.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements and the
engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the following engineering
information.
4.4.3 Configuration Process

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

This topic describes how to configure the PORT-shared EVPL services by using the trail function
on the T2000.
4.4.4 Creating a Trunk Link
This topic describes how to create a trunk link when a PORT-shared EPL service is configured
by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.
4.4.5 Creating an EPL Trail
This topic describes how to create an EPL trail when a PORT-shared EPL service is configured
by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.

4.4.1 Engineering Requirements


In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added. The requirements for
the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
l The headquarters of company C located at NE1 must transmit data services to the two
branches (C1 and C2) located at NE3 through the MSTP equipment.
l The services of the two branches must be isolated completely.
l Branch C1 requires a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth, and branch C2 requires a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The Ethernet switch of company C must provide the 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet
electrical ports that support VLAN.

4.4.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements and the
engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the following engineering
information.
l Networking diagram
l Board layout of each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-16 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

4-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-16 Ethernet service networking and port allocation


Headquarters of A

PORT2

T2000

NE1
STM-1 linear MSP
chain
STM-4 two-fiber
NE2 bidirectional MSP ring NE4

NE3

PORT2 PORT3 VCTRUNK

C1 C2

Board Information of Each NE


Based on the service type and the traffic volume, one EMS1 and one ETFS8 board are added to
NE1 and NE3. Other NEs require no new boards. Figure 4-17 shows the board information of
NE1. Figure 4-18 shows the board information of NE3.

Figure 4-17 Board layout of NE1


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C M T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S S 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 1 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-18 Board layout of NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U
1 1 S S S F X
S
4 4 S
1 C PIU
A A
C 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-19 shows the service configuration diagram of NE1 and NE3.

Figure 4-19 Service configuration diagram

PORT VCTRUNK VCTRUNK PORT

PORT2
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 C1
C
PORT2
VC4-1: VC12-1 to
SDH VC4-1: VC12-1 to
10 Mbit/s
VC12-5 VC12-5 PORT3
C2
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 20 Mbit/s
VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC4-1: VC12-6 to
VC12-15 VC12-15

NE1
NE3

Table 4-14 lists the mapping relation of Ethernet service connection.

Table 4-14 Ethernet service connection

Item C1 C2

NE NE1

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-15

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 10xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of the source port Tag aware

4-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Item C1 C2

Source VLAN ID 100 200

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-15

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 10xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of the sink port Access Access

VLAN ID 100 200

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


The SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services is as shown in Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20 SDH timeslot allocation diagram


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1

Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC12:1-15
2#VC4 9-EMS1:VC4-1: 9-EMS1:VC4-1:
VC12:1-15 VC12:1-15

Add/Drop

NOTE

l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the ETFS8 board.

l On the EMS1, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only and VCTRUNK13 to
VCTRUNK24 can be bound with VC4-2 only.
l On the EMS1, paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2, but paths at only one
of the two levels can be bound in a VC-4.

4.4.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the PORT-shared EVPL services by using the trail function
on the T2000.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

NOTE

Ethernet service can be created by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function.
If you purchase the license with trail function, you can create Ethernet service by using the trail function.
Otherwise, you can create Ethernet service only by using the per-NE configuration function.

Table 4-15 provides the process of creating the PORT-shared EVPL service by using the trail
function on the T2000.

Table 4-15 Process of configuring the PORT-shared EVPL services by using the trail function

Proce Operation Remarks


dure

1 Creating a server trail See 2.15.1 Creating a VC-4 Server Trail.

2 Creating a trunk link -

3 Creating an EPL trail -

4.4.4 Creating a Trunk Link


This topic describes how to create a trunk link when a PORT-shared EPL service is configured
by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The license that supports the trial function must be available.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > Trunk Link Creation from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the window that is displayed, set the bandwidth as 5xVC-12.

Step 3 Click Browse. Select the source NE (NE1). Select the EMS1 board, then select 1 for VCTRUNK
Port, and then select VC4:-1-VC12(1)–VC4-1:VC12(5) for Available Timeslot. Click OK.

Step 4 Click Browse. Select the source NE (NE3). Select the EMS1 board, then select 1 for VCTRUNK
Port, and then select VC4:2-VC12(1)–VC4:2-VC12(5) for Available Timeslot. Click OK.

Step 5 Select the Activate the trail check box, and adopt default settings for other parameters.

Step 6 Click Apply to create the trunk link from NE1 to NE3 (from user C to user C1).

Step 7 Refer to Table 4-14 and refer to Steps 2–6 to create the trunk link from NE1 to NE3 (from user
C to user C2).

----End

4-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4.4.5 Creating an EPL Trail


This topic describes how to create an EPL trail when a PORT-shared EPL service is configured
by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The license that supports the trial function must be available.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > Ethernet Trail Creation > EPL Creation from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Set the following parameters regarding the source in the window that is displayed:
l Port Usage Strategy: PORT+VLAN
l Click Browse. Select NE1 and select the EMS1 board. Select PORT2 as the source port.
l VLAN ID: 100

Step 3 Set parameters regarding the sink as follows:


l Port Usage Strategy: PORT+VLAN
l Click Browse. Select NE3 and select the EMS1 board. Select PORT2 as the sink port.
l VLAN ID: 100

Step 4 Select Use Existing Trunk Links for Trunk Link Route Strategy.
l Set the Bandwidth as 5xVC12 and Name to Trunk_Link-0003.
l Click Next.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Step 5 In the window that is displayed, set the port attributes as follows:
l Set the attributes of PORT2 on NE1 as follows:
– TAG: Tag Aware
– Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l NE1-9-EMS1-VCTRUNK1: Enabled (Enabling LCAS)
l Set the attributes of PORT2 on NE3 as follows:
– TAG: Access
– Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l NE1-9-EMS1-VCTRUNK2: Enabled (Enabling LCAS)
l Select the Activate check box.

Step 6 Click Finish.


Step 7 Refer to Table 4-14 and refer to Steps 1–6 to create the EPL trail from user C at NE1 to user
C2 at NE5.

----End

4.5 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services by


Using the Per-NE Configuration Function
The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that share
the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services on the T2000
by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topic describes
how to configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services by using the per-NE configuration
function.
4.5.1 Engineering Requirements
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.

4-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4.5.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements and the
engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the following engineering
information.
4.5.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service on the T2000.
4.5.4 Configuring the Data of NE2
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.
4.5.5 Configuring the Data of NE3
The method of configuring the data of NE3 is the same as the method of configuring the data of
NE2.

4.5.1 Engineering Requirements


In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
The requirements for the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
l Department A at NE2 must transmit data services to department A' at NE3 through the
MSTP equipment.
l Department B at NE2 must transmit data services to department B' at NE3 through the
MSTP equipment.
l The services of the two branches must be isolated completely.
l Services of the two departments can share a 45 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l Ethernet equipment of users can provide 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet ports that support
VLAN.

4.5.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements and the
engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the following engineering
information.
l Networking diagram
l Board Information of Each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-21 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-21 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

NE1
T200
0

PORT1
A

NE2 NE4
STM-4

NE5
B PORT2
NE3

PORT1 PORT2
VCTRUNK

A' B'

Board Information of Each NE


Based on the service type and the traffic volume, one EMS1 and one ETFS8 board are added to
NE2 and NE3. Other NEs require no new boards. Figure 4-22 shows the board information of
NE2. Figure 4-23 shows the board information of NE3.

Figure 4-22 Board layout of NE2


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C M T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S S 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 1 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

4-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-23 Board layout of NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U
1 1 S S S F X
S
4 4 S
1 C PIU
A A
C 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-24 shows the service configuration diagram of NE2 and NE3.

Figure 4-24 Service configuration diagram

PORT VCTRUNK VCTRUNK PORT


SDH

A PORT2 PORT2
A'

PORT3 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 PORT3


B VC4-1: VC3-1 VC4-1: VC3-1 B'

NE2
NE3

NOTE

l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the ETFS8 board.
l On the EMS1, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only and VCTRUNK13 to
VCTRUNK24 can be bound with VC4-2 only.
l On the EMS1, paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2, but paths at only one
of the two levels can be bound in a VC-4.

Table 4-16 lists the mapping relation of Ethernet service connection.

Table 4-16 Ethernet service connection

Item A B

NE NE2

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

Timeslot VC4-1:VC3-1

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Item A B

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1

Bound bandwidth 1xVC-3

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access Access

PORT VLAN ID 100 200

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

Timeslot VC4-1:VC3-1

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1

Bound bandwidth 1xVC-3

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access Access

PORT VLAN ID 100 200

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 4-25 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.

Figure 4-25 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1

Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC3:1
2#VC4 9-EMS1:VC4- 9-EMS1:VC4-
1:VC3:1 1:VC3:1

Add/Drop

4.5.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service on the T2000.

Table 4-17 provides the process of configuring the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service on the
T2000.

4-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

NOTE

This topic describes the procedures and precautions for configuring Ethernet services on the T2000. For
details, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Operation Guide for SDH.

Table 4-17 Flow for configuring the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service


Proced Operation Remarks
ure

1 Creating a board For details, see 4.1.4


Creating a Board.

2 Configuring port attributes of the Ethernet board and -


bound paths

3 Creating a cross-connection between the Ethernet -


board and the line board

4 Creating an EPL Trail -

5 Configuring the CAR parameters (optional) -

4.5.4 Configuring the Data of NE2


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

See the OptiX iManager T2000 Help for the meaning of each parameter.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE2 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface. Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT2 and PORT3
as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l For other parameters, adopt the default values.


4. Click Apply.
5. Click the TAG tab and set the attributes of PORT2 and PORT3 as follows:
l TAG: Access
l Default VLAN ID for PORT2: 100
l Default VLAN ID for PORT3: 200
l Entry Detection: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
6. Click Apply.

Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports as follows:


1. Choose Internal Port > LCAS and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 as follows:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 as follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled
4. Click Apply.

Step 3 Configure bound paths as follows:


1. In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configure, and the bound path configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters in the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC3-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1
l Available Timeslots: VC3-1

Then, click .
4. Click OK.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE2 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. Set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Level: VC3
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1

4-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1, 3-6): 1


l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-1
l Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1, 3-6): 1
l Activate Immediately: Yes
5. Click OK.
Step 5 Create the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service as follows:
1. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function
Tree.
3. Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
4. Refer to Table 4-16, and set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the EPL
service from A to A':
l Service Type: EPL
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Port: PORT2
l Source VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 100
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
l Sink VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 100
5. Click Apply.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

6. Repeat Step 3 to create the EPL service from B to B'. Set the following parameters in the
dialog box:
l Service Type: EPL
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Port: PORT3
l Source VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 200
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
l Sink VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6): 200
7. Click OK.
Step 6 Optional: Configure the CAR parameters as follows:
1. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree.

4-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

2. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function
Tree. Click the CAR Configuration tab.
3. Click Create, and the Create CAR dialog box is displayed.
4. Set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l CAR ID: 1
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Committed Information Rate(kbit/s): 20480
l Committed Burst Size(kbyte): 0
l Peak Information Rate(kbit/s): 40960
l Maximum Burst Size(kbyte): 0

5. Click Apply.
6. Set the following parameters according to the method in substep 5.
l CAR ID: 2
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Committed Information Rate(kbit/s): 20480
l Committed Burst Size(kbyte): 0
l Peak Information Rate(kbit/s): 40960
l Maximum Burst Size(kbyte): 0
7. Click OK.
8. Click the Flow Configuration tab and set the parameters as follows:
l Bound CAR for PORT2 and for VCTRUNK1 with the VLAN ID being 100: 1
l Bound CAR for PORT3 and for VCTRUNK1 with the VLAN ID being 200: 2

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

9. Click Apply.

----End

Parameters

Table 4-18 CAR parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

CAR ID 1–2048 1 Indicates the CAR number.

Enabled/ Enabled, Disabled Indicates whether the CAR function


Disabled Disabled is enabled.

Committed You can enter 0 Defines a minimum committed


Information an integer bandwidth for an Ethernet service.
Rate (bit/s) ranging from 0 Its value represents an average rate.
to 1048576 in
steps of 64.
Alternately, you
can select from
the following
values: 512
kbit/s, 1 Mbit/s,
2 Mbit/s, 3
Mbit/s, 4 Mbit/
s, 5 Mbit/s, 6
Mbit/s, 7 Mbit/
s, 8 Mbit/s, 9
Mbit/s, 10 Mbit/
s, 20 Mbit/s, 30
Mbit/s, 40 Mbit/
s, 50 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s, and
1000 Mbit/s.

Committed 0 0 Defines the maximum guaranteed


Burst Size data amount that an Ethernet service
(kbyte) can transmit within a time interval.

Table 4-19 Flow configuration parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Bound CAR - - Displays or sets the CAR ID bound


with the flow.

Bound CoS - - Displays or sets the CoS ID bound


with the flow.

4-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4.5.5 Configuring the Data of NE3


The method of configuring the data of NE3 is the same as the method of configuring the data of
NE2.

See Figure 4-24 and 4.5.4 Configuring the Data of NE2.

4.6 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services by


Using the Trail Function
The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services execute point-to-point interconnected services that share
the SDH bandwidth. You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services on the T2000
by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topicdescribes
how to configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services by using the trail function.
4.6.1 Engineering Requirements
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
4.6.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements and the
engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the following engineering
information.
4.6.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service by using the trail
function on the T2000.
4.6.4 Creating a Trunk Link
This topic describes how to create a trunk link when a VCTRUNK-shared EPL service is
configured by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter
setting.
4.6.5 Creating an EPL Trail
This topic describes how to create an EPL trail when a VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service is
configured by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter
setting.

4.6.1 Engineering Requirements


In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.

The requirements for the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.

l Department A at NE2 must transmit data services to department A' at NE3 through the
MSTP equipment.
l Department B at NE2 must transmit data services to department B' at NE3 through the
MSTP equipment.
l The services of the two branches must be isolated completely.
l Services of the two departments can share a 45 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l Ethernet equipment of users can provide 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet ports that support
VLAN.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.6.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements and the
engineering information described in Chapter 1, and outputs the following engineering
information.
l Networking diagram
l Board Information of Each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-26 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

Figure 4-26 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

NE1
T200
0

PORT1
A

NE2 NE4
STM-4

NE5
B PORT2
NE3

PORT1 PORT2
VCTRUNK

A' B'

Board Information of Each NE


Based on the service type and the traffic volume, one EMS1 and one ETFS8 board are added to
NE2 and NE3. Other NEs require no new boards. Figure 4-27 shows the board information of
NE2. Figure 4-28 shows the board information of NE3.

4-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-27 Board layout of NE2


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C M T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S S 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 1 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Figure 4-28 Board layout of NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U
1 1 S S S F X
S
4 4 S
1 C PIU
A A
C 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-29 shows the service configuration diagram of NE2 and NE3.

Figure 4-29 Service configuration diagram

PORT VCTRUNK VCTRUNK PORT


SDH

A PORT2 PORT2
A'

PORT3 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 PORT3


B VC4-1: VC3-1 VC4-1: VC3-1 B'

NE2
NE3

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

NOTE

l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the ETFS8 board.
l On the EMS1, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only and VCTRUNK13 to
VCTRUNK24 can be bound with VC4-2 only.
l On the EMS1, paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2, but paths at only one
of the two levels can be bound in a VC-4.

Table 4-20 lists the mapping relation of Ethernet service connection.

Table 4-20 Ethernet service connection


Item A B

NE NE2

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

Timeslot VC4-1:VC3-1

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1

Bound bandwidth 1xVC-3

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access Access

PORT VLAN ID 100 200

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

Timeslot VC4-1:VC3-1

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1

Bound bandwidth 1xVC-3

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access Access

PORT VLAN ID 100 200

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 4-30 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.

4-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-30 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1

Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC3:1
2#VC4 9-EMS1:VC4- 9-EMS1:VC4-
1:VC3:1 1:VC3:1

Add/Drop

4.6.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service by using the trail
function on the T2000.

Table 4-21 lists the flow for configuring the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service.

NOTE

Ethernet services can be created by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function.
If you purchase the license with trail function, you can create Ethernet service by using the trail function.
Otherwise, you can only create Ethernet services by using the per-NE configuration function.

Table 4-21 Flow of configuring the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service (by trail)

Proce Operation Remarks


dure

1 Creating a server trail See 2.15.1 Creating a VC-4 Server Trail.

2 Creating a trunk link -

3 Creating an EPL trail -

4 Configuring the CAR See Step 6 in 4.5.4 Configuring the Data of NE2.
parameters (optional)

4.6.4 Creating a Trunk Link


This topic describes how to create a trunk link when a VCTRUNK-shared EPL service is
configured by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter
setting.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l The license that supports the trial function must be available.


l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > Trunk Link Creation from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the window that is displayed, set the bandwidth to 1xVC-3.

Step 3 Click Browse. Select NE2 as the source NE. Select the EMS1 board, then select 1 for
VCTRUNK Port. Select 1 for the higher order timeslot. Select VC4:1-VC3:1 for the lower
order timeslot. Click OK.

Step 4 Click Browse. Select NE3 as the sink NE. Select the EMS1 board, then select 1 for VCTRUNK
Port. Select 1 for the higher order timeslot. Select VC4:1-VC3:1 for the lower order timeslot.
Click OK.

Step 5 Select the Activate the trail check box, and adopt default settings for other parameters.

Step 6 Click Apply to create the trunk link from NE2 to NE3 that is shared by users A, A', B, and B'.

----End

4.6.5 Creating an EPL Trail


This topic describes how to create an EPL trail when a VCTRUNK-shared EVPL service is
configured by using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter
setting.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The license that supports the trial function must be available.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l The trunk link must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > Ethernet Trail Creation > EPL Creation from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Set the following parameters regarding the source in the window that is displayed:
1. Set the parameters regarding the source as follows:
l Port Usage Strategy: PORT+VLAN
l Click Browse. Select NE2 and select a proper source line port PORT2.
l VLAN ID: 100
2. Set the parameters regarding the sink as follows:
l Port Usage Strategy: PORT+VLAN

4-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Click Browse. Select NE3 and select a proper sink line port PORT2.
l VLAN ID: 100
3. Select Use Existing Trunk Links for Trunk Link Route Strategy.
l Select a Trunk_Link with a bandwidth of 1xVC-3.
l Click Next.

Step 3 In the window that is displayed, set the port attributes as follows:
1. Set the attributes of PORT2 on NE2 as follows:
l TAG: Access
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
2. NE2-9-EMS1-VCTRUNK1: Enabled (Enabling LCAS)
3. Set attributes of PORT1 as follows for NE3:
l TAG: Access
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
4. NE3-9-EMS1-VCTRUNK1: Enabled (LCAS Enabled)
5. Select the Activate check box.

Step 4 Click Finish to complete the configuration of the EPL trail from user A at NE2 to user A' at
NE3.

Step 5 Refer to Steps 1–5 to create the EPL trail from user B at NE2 to user B' at NE3.

----End

4.7 Configuring the Ingress/Egress EVPL Services by Using


the Per-NE Configuration Function
When the data of multiple users is transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, the ingress/egress EVPL
service is used to isolate the data by using the VLAN ID and MPLS labels. You can configure
the ingress/egress EVPL service on the T2000 by using the per-NE configuration function.
4.7.1 Engineering Requirements
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
4.7.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
4.7.3 Configuration Process
The EVPL services of different clients can share the same bandwidth. This topic describes how
to configure the ingress/egress EVPL service on the T2000.
4.7.4 Configuring the Data of NE1
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.
4.7.5 Configuring the Data of NE2
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.
4.7.6 Configuring the Data of NE3
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.7.1 Engineering Requirements


In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
The requirements for the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
l Department A at NE1 must transmit data services to department A' at NE3 through the
MSTP equipment.
l Department B at NE1 must transmit data services to department B' at NE3 through the
MSTP equipment.
l The services of the two branches must be isolated completely.
l Services of the two departments can share a 45 Mbit/s bandwidth. The Ethernet equipment
of users provides 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet electrical ports and adopts the same
VLAN.

4.7.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
The engineering design department outputs the following engineering information based on the
engineering information described in Chapter 1:
l Networking diagram
l Board layout of each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-31 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

4-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-31 Ethernet service networking and port allocation


Department A Department B

NE1

NE2 STM-4
NE4
NE5

NE3 Company A Company B

Department A’ Department B’

Board Information of Each NE


Based on the service type and the traffic volume, one EMS1 and one ETFS8 board are added to
NE1 and NE3. Other NEs require no new boards. Figure 4-32 shows the board information of
NE1. Figure 4-33 shows the board information of NE3.

Figure 4-32 Board layout of NE1


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C M T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S S 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 1 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-33 Board layout of NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U
1 1 S S S F X
S
4 4 S
1 C PIU
A A
C 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-34 shows the service configuration diagram of NE1 and NE3.

Figure 4-34 Service configuration diagram

PORT VCTRUNK VCTRUNK PORT


SDH
Tunnel: 20
Tunnel: 20
A PORT2 VC: 30 PORT2
VC: 30
A'
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT3 PORT3
B VC4-1: VC3-1 VC4-1: VC3-1 B'
Tunnel: 20 Tunnel: 20
VC: 35 VC: 35

NE1
NE3

NOTE

l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the ETFS8 board.
l On the EMS1, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only and VCTRUNK13 to
VCTRUNK24 can be bound with VC4-2 only.
l Paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2. But paths at only one of the two levels
can be bound in a VC-4.

Table 4-22 lists the mapping relation of Ethernet service connection.

Table 4-22 Ethernet service connection

Item A B

NE NE1

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

Timeslot VC4-1:VC3-1 VC4-1:VC3-1

4-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Item A B

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1

Bound bandwidth 1xVC-3

Sink tunnel 20 20

Sink VC 30 35

Working mode Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

TAG Tag aware Tag aware

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

Timeslot VC4-1:VC3-1 VC4-1:VC3-1

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1

Bound bandwidth 1xVC-3

Sink tunnel 20 20

Sink VC 30 35

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Tag aware Tag aware

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 4-35 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.

Figure 4-35 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1

Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC3:1
2#VC4 9-EMS1:VC4-1:VC3:1 9-EMS1:VC4-1:VC3:1

Add/Drop

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.7.3 Configuration Process


The EVPL services of different clients can share the same bandwidth. This topic describes how
to configure the ingress/egress EVPL service on the T2000.
NOTE

This topic describes the procedures and precautions for configuring Ethernet services on the T2000. For
details, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Operation Guide for SDH.

Table 4-23 lists the flow for configuring the EVPLAN service.

Table 4-23 Process of configuring the ingress/egress service

Proce Operation Remarks


dure

1 Creating a board For details, see 4.1.4 Creating a


Board.

2 Configuring port attributes of the Ethernet -


board and bound paths

3 Creating a cross-connection between the -


Ethernet board and the line board

4 Creating EPL services -

5 Configuring the QoS parameters of the This operation is optional. See 4.5.4
service (if required) Configuring the Data of NE2.

4.7.4 Configuring the Data of NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

See the OptiX iManager T2000 Help for the meaning of each parameter.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface. Click .

4-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT2 and PORT3
as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of PORT2 and PORT3 as follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click the Network Attributes tab and set Port Type of PORT2 and PORT3 to PE.
8. Click Apply.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports as follows:
1. Choose Internal Port > LCAS and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 as follows:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 as follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the Network Attributes tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 as follows:
l Port Type: P
l Encapsulation Format of P Port: MartinioE

6. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure bound paths as follows:
1. In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configure, and the bound path configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters in the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC3-xv

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC3-1 from Available Resources and click .


4. Click OK.
Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE1 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. Set the parameters as follows in the dialog box.
l Level: VC-3
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1, 3-6): 1
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1, 3-6): 1
l Activate Immediately: Yes
5. Click OK.
Step 5 Create an EVPL service as follows.
1. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Select the Display MPLS Shared
Service check box.
2. Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
3. See Figure 4-34, and set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the EVPL
service from A to A':
l Service Type: EVPL (MPLS)
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Source port: PORT2
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
l Sink Tunnel: 20
l Sink VC: 30
4. Click Apply.

4-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

5. Repeat Step 3 to create the EVPL service from B to B'. Set the following parameters in the
dialog box:
l Service Type: EVPL (MPLS)
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Port: PORT3
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
l Sink Tunnel: 20
l Sink VC: 35
6. Click OK.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.7.5 Configuring the Data of NE2


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE2 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
Step 2 See Figure 4-35 and configure the SNCP services from NE1 to NE3 so that the services are
passed through NE2. Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service
dialog box:
l Level: VC-3
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-2
l Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1, 3-6): 1
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1, 3-6): 1
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

4.7.6 Configuring the Data of NE3


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

NOTE

The method of configuring the data of NE3 is the same as the method of configuring the data of NE1. See
4.7.4 Configuring the Data of NE1.

4.8 Configuring the Transit EVPL Service by Using the Per-


NE Configuration Function
The EVPL services of different users can share the same VCTRUNK, where switching of the
MPLS labels ensures the interworking between the MPLS networks. You can configure the
transit EVPL service on the T2000 by using the per-NE configuration function.
4.8.1 Engineering Requirements
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
4.8.2 Engineering Planning

4-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.


4.8.3 Configuration Process
The transit service is a type of EVPL service. This topic describes how to configure the transit
EVPL service on the T2000.
4.8.4 Configuring the Data of NE1
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.
4.8.5 Configuring the Data of NE2
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.
4.8.6 Configuring the Data of NE3
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

4.8.1 Engineering Requirements


In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
The requirements for the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
l The headquarters of company C located at NE1 must transmit data services to the two
branches (C1 and C2) located at NE2 and NE3 through the MSTP equipment.
l The services of the two branches must be isolated completely.
l Each of branch C1 and branch C2 must occupy a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The MPLS router of company C provides 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet electrical ports
but transmits only MPLS data packets.

4.8.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
The engineering design department outputs the following engineering information based on the
engineering information described in Chapter 1:
l Networking diagram
l Board layout of each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-36 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-36 Ethernet service networking and port allocation


Headquarters of C

PORT2

NE1

NE2
PORT2
C1
STM-4
tunnel=70
NE4 NE5

NE3
PORT2
Tunnel = 80

C2

Board Information of Each NE


Based on the service type and the traffic volume, one EMS1 and one ETFS8 board are added to
NE1, NE2, and NE3. Other NEs require no new boards. Figure 4-37 shows the board layout of
NE1. Figure 4-38 shows the board layout of NE2 and NE3.

Figure 4-37 Board layout of NE1


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C M T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S S 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 1 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

4-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-38 Board layout of NE2 and NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U
1 1 S S S F X
S
4 4 S
1 C PIU
A A
C 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-39 shows the service configuration diagram of NE1, NE2, and NE3.

Figure 4-39 Service configuration diagram


VCTRUNK PORT

Tunnel: Tunnel:
30 70 PORT2
C1
PORT VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1
VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5

MPLS
Tunnel: Tunnel:
switch
70 30
PORT2 VCTRUNK1 NE2
C VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5

Tunnel:
80 MPLS 20
Tunnel: VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK PORT
VC4-1: VC12 to 6~VC12-10
switch
Tunnel: Tunnel:
NE1 20 80 PORT2
C2
VCTRUNK1
VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5

SDH MPLS
switch
NE3

NOTE

l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the ETFS8 board.
l On the EMS1, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only and VCTRUNK13 to
VCTRUNK24 can be bound with VC4-2 only.
l Paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2. But paths at only one of the two levels
can be bound in a VC-4.

Table 4-24 lists the mapping relation of Ethernet service connection.

Table 4-24 Ethernet service connection

Item C←→C1 C←→C2

NE NE1

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Item C←→C1 C←→C2

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Source tunnel 70 80

Sink tunnel 30 20

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Tag aware

NE NE2 NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Source tunnel 70 80

Sink tunnel 30 20

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Tag aware Tag aware

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 4-40 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.

4-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-40 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1

Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC12:1-5
2#VC4
9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1:
VC12:1-5 VC12:1-5
VC12:1-5
9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1:
VC12:6-10 VC12:6-10

Add/Drop

9E: 9-EMS1

4.8.3 Configuration Process


The transit service is a type of EVPL service. This topic describes how to configure the transit
EVPL service on the T2000.
NOTE

This topic describes the procedures and precautions for configuring Ethernet services on the T2000. For
details, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Operation Guide for SDH.

Table 4-25 provides the process of configuring the transit EVPL service on the T2000.

Table 4-25 Process of configuring the transit EVPL service

Proce Operation Remarks


dure

1 Creating a board For details, see 4.1.4 Creating a


Board.

2 Configuring port attributes of the Ethernet -


board and bound paths

3 Creating a cross-connection between the -


Ethernet board and the line board

4 Creating an EVPL service -

5 Configuring the QoS parameters of the This operation is optional. See 4.5.4
service (if required) Configuring the Data of NE2.

4.8.4 Configuring the Data of NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

See the OptiX iManager T2000 Help for the meaning of each parameter.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface. Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT2 as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of PORT2 as follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click the Network Attributes tab and set the attributes of PORT2 as follows:
l Port Type: P
l Encapsulation Format of P Port: MartinioE
8. Click Apply.
Step 2 Configure the Ethernet internal ports as follows:
1. Choose Internal Port > LCAS and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as
follows:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as
follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled

4-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4. Click Apply.
5. Click the Network Attributes tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2
as follows:
l Port Type: P
l Encapsulation Format of P Port: MartinioE

6. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure bound paths as follows:
1. In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters in the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-1–VC12-5 in Available Timeslots. Click .


4. Click Apply.
5. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK2, set the parameters as follows in the dialog box.
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
l To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK2, set the parameters as follows in the dialog
box.
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-6–VC12-10 in Available Timeslots. Click .


6. Click OK.
Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE1 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. Set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the SDH service from C1 to C1:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l Source VC4: VC4-1


l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Activate Immediately: Yes
5. Click OK.
6. Set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the SDH service from C to C2:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 6–10
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 6–10
l Activate Immediately: Yes
7. Click OK.
Step 5 Create the EVPL service as follows:
1. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Select the Display MPLS Shared
Service check box.
2. Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
3. See Figure 4-39, and set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the EVPL
service from C to C1:
l Service Type: Transit (MPLS)
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Port: PORT2
l Source Tunnel: 70
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
l Sink Tunnel: 30

4-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4. Click Apply.
5. Repeat Step 3 to create the EVPL service from C to C2. Set the following parameters in
the dialog box:
l Service Type: Transit (MPLS)
l Service Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Port: PORT2
l Source Tunnel: 80
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK2
l Sink Tunnel: 20
6. Click OK.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.8.5 Configuring the Data of NE2


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

See the OptiX iManager T2000 Help for the meaning of each parameter.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Ethernet ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE2 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface. Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT2 as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of PORT2 as follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click the Network Attributes tab and set the attributes of PORT2 as follows:
l Port Type: P
l Encapsulation Format of P Port: MartinioE
8. Click Apply.
9. Choose Internal Port > LCAS and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 as follows:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
10. Click Apply.
11. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 as follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware

4-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Entry Detection: Enabled


12. Click Apply.
13. Click the Network Attributes tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 as follows:
l Port Type: P
l Encapsulation Format of P Port: MartinioE

Step 2 Configure bound paths as follows:


1. In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters in the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-1–VC12-5 in Available Timeslots. Click .


4. Click OK.
Step 3 Configure cross-connect from the Ethernet board to the SDH line board.
1. Select NE2 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. Set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the SDH service from C1 to C:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Activate Immediately: Yes
5. Click OK.
Step 4 Create the EVPL service as follows:
1. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Select the Display MPLS Shared
Service check box.
2. Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
3. See Figure 4-39, and set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the EVPL
service from C1 to C:
l Service Type: Transit (MPLS)
l Service Direction: Bidirectional

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l Source port: PORT2


l Source Tunnel: 70
l Sink Port: VCTRUNK1
l Sink Tunnel: 30
4. Click OK.

----End

4.8.6 Configuring the Data of NE3


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

NOTE
The method of configuring the data of NE3 is the same as the method of configuring the data of NE2. See
4.8.5 Configuring the Data of NE2.

4.9 Configuring the 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Service by


Using the Per-NE Configuration Function
The EPLAN service implements the dynamic sharing of the Ethernet service bandwidth between
multiple points, thus meeting the requirements of the dynamic features of the data services and
saving the bandwidth resources. You can configure the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN service on
the T2000 by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function. This topic
describes how to configure the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN service by using the single station
function.
4.9.1 Engineering Requirements
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
4.9.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
4.9.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the EPLAN service by using the per-NE configuration
function on the T2000.
4.9.4 Configuring the Data of NE3
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.
4.9.5 Configuring the Data of NE2
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.
4.9.6 Configuring the Data of NE4
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE4.

4.9.1 Engineering Requirements


In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.

The requirements for the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.

l Three branches (F2, F1, and F3) of company F are located at NE2, NE3, and NE4. F2 needs
to communicate with F1 and F3. F1 and F3 need not communicate with each other.

4-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l The three branches must share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth.


l The Ethernet equipment of company F provides the 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet ports
that support VLAN.

4.9.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
The engineering design department outputs the following engineering information based on the
engineering information described in Chapter 1:
l Networking diagram
l Board layout of each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-41 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

Figure 4-41 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

NE1
T2000
VCTRUNK1 VB

PORT2
VB VCTRUNK1
NE2
PORT2 STM-4 two-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring NE4
PORT2 PORT2

NE3 NE5

F3
F1
PORT2

VCTRUNK1 VB VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK


PORT2
F2

Board Information of Each NE


Based on the service type and the traffic volume, one EMS1 and one ETFS8 board are added to
NE2, NE3, and NE4. Other NEs require no new boards. Figure 4-42 shows the board layout of
NE2 and NE3. Figure 4-43 shows the board layout of NE4.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-42 Board layout of NE2 and NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C M T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S S 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 1 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Figure 4-43 Board layout of NE4


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U
1 1 S S S F X
S
4 4 S
1 C PIU
A A
C 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-44 shows the service configuration diagram of NE2, NE3, and NE4.

Figure 4-44 Service configuration diagram


VCTRUNK PORT

LP2 LP1 PORT2


F1
PORT VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1
VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5

VB1
LP2
PORT2 LP1 VCTRUNK1 NE2
F2 VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5
LP3
VCTRUNK2
VB1 VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC12-10 VCTRUNK PORT

NE3 LP2 LP1 PORT2


F3
VCTRUNK1
VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5

SDH
VB1
NE4

4-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

NOTE

l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the ETFS8 board.
l On the EMS1, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only and VCTRUNK13 to
VCTRUNK24 can be bound with VC4-2 only.
l Paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2. But paths at only one of the two levels
can be bound in a VC-4.

The 802.1q VB is used to implement EPLAN services of which the user VLAN is not defined.
Table 4-26 shows the Ethernet service connection relations.

Table 4-26 Ethernet service connection

Item F

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2

Slot-port working mode Auto-negotiation

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Mapping protocol GFP

Enabling LCAS Enabled

Entry detection Disabled

VB VB1

Bridge type 802.1d

Bridge switch mode SVL/Ingress filter disable

VB mount port PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

NE NE2 NE4

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-2

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Mapping protocol GFP

Enabling LCAS Enabled

Entry detection Disabled

VB VB1

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Item F

Bridge type 802.1d

Bridge switch mode SVL/Ingress filter disable

Mounted port PORT2, VCTRUNK1 PORT2, VCTRUNK1

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 4-45 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.

Figure 4-45 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1
Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-128-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC12:1-5 VC12:1-5
2#VC4 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1:
VC12:1-5 VC12:1-5 VC12:6-10 VC12:1-5

Forward

Add/Drop

9E: 9-EMS1

4.9.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the EPLAN service by using the per-NE configuration
function on the T2000.
NOTE

This topic describes the procedures and precautions for configuring Ethernet services on the T2000. For
details, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Operation Guide for SDH.

Table 4-27 provides the process of configuring the EPLAN service on the T2000.

Table 4-27 Process of configuring the EPLAN service

Proc Operation Remarks


edur
e

1 Creating a board For details, see 4.1.4 Creating a


Board.

2 Configuring port attributes of the Ethernet -


board and bound paths

4-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Proc Operation Remarks


edur
e

3 Creating a cross-connection between the -


Ethernet board and the line board

4 Creating EPLAN services -

6 Enabling the STP (if the service is This operation is optional. See 7
configured in a ring) Configuring the STP or RSTP.

7 Configuring the QoS parameters of the This operation is optional. See 4.5.4
service (if required) Configuring the Data of NE2.

4.9.4 Configuring the Data of NE3


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPLAN function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

Refer to the T2000 Help for the meaning of each parameter when you configure a service.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE3 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface. Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT2 as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Set Entry Detection of PORT2 to Disabled.
6. Click Apply.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports as follows:


1. Select Internal Port. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Set Entry Detection of VCTRUNK1
and VCTRUNK2 to Disabled.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and
VCTRUNK2 as follows:
l Mapping Protocol: GFP
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the LCAS tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as follows:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
6. Click Apply.

Step 3 Configure bound paths as follows:


1. In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters In the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-1–VC12-5 in Available Timeslots. Click .


4. Click Apply.
5. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK2, set the parameters as follows in the dialog box.
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-6–VC12-10 in Available Timeslots. Click .


6. Click OK.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE3 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. Set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the service from F2 to F1:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)

4-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Source VC4: VC4-1


l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Activate Immediately: Yes
5. Click Apply.
6. Set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the service from F2 to F3:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 6–10
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Activate Immediately: Yes
7. Click OK.

Step 5 To create the EPLAN services, do as follows:


1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New and the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.
3. Set VB Name to VB1.
4. Set VB Type to 802.1d.
5. Click Configure Mounted Port and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog box is
displayed.

6. Set VB Mount Port to PORT2, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Then, click .


7. Click OK.
8. Click OK in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box.

----End

Parameters

Table 4-28 Parameters for configuring the Ethernet LAN service

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Board - - Indicates the board that needs to be


configured with the Ethernet
service.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

VB name A maximum of - Indicates the VB name. The concept


16 English of virtual bridge or various bridge
characters (VB) is originally developed by
Huawei. In the case of the Ethernet
data boards that have the Layer 2
switching capability, the switching
domain can be divided into multiple
separate sub-switching domains. As
a result, if no services are
interconnected, different VBs
cannot access each other. Each VB
has an independent configuration
mode and uses an independent
VLAN. Different VBs can use the
same VLAN.

Bridge type 802.1d 802.1q l 802.1d: shared learning bridge


802.1q that supports only the MAC
address forwarding-based Layer
2 switching
l 802.1q: VLAN-based
independent learning bridge that
supports isolation by using one
layer of VLAN tags

Bridge switch IVL/Ingress IVL/Ingress l In the case of the 802.1q bridge,


mode filtering enabled filter enable the bridge switching mode is
SVL/Ingress SVL/ingress filter enabled.
filtering l In the case of the 802.1d bridge,
disabled the bridge switching mode is
SVL/ingress filter disabled.

Bridge learning SVL IVL To forward a Layer-2 switching


mode IVL service, a network bridge must learn
the MAC address. A bridge learns
the MAC address in one of the
following two ways:
l Shared VLAN learning (SVL):
forwarding and learning based
on the MAC address only
l Independent VLAN learning:
forwarding and learning based
on the MAC address and VLAN

4-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Ingress filtering Enable, Disable Enabled In the case of the data packets that
access the bridge, you need to
determine whether to check the
validity of the VLAN ID based on
the bridge.
l Ingress filter disabled: The
validity of the VLAN ID is not
checked. That is, all the packets
to enter the bridge are valid.
l Ingress filter enabled: The
validity of the VLAN ID is
checked. If a packet received at
the port does not belong to the
VLAN of the bridge port, the
packet is discarded.

Mounted port - - Indicates the mounted ports, which


may be PORT or VCTRUNK.

Port type P, PE PE l Indicates Provider Edge (PE),


which refers to the edge port of
the service provider. A PE port
(the default MPLS encapsulation
type is invalid) can transmit or
receive standard Ethernet
packets.
l Indicates Provider (P), which
refers to the port in the core
network of the service provider.
A P port can transmit or receive
the data packets with the MPLS
labels (the default TAG attribute
is invalid).

Enabled/ Enabled, Enabled Specifies to enable or disable the


Disabled Disabled. port.
l Enabled: means that the port can
access services.
l Disabled: means that the port
cannot access services.

4.9.5 Configuring the Data of NE2


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPL function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

Refer to the T2000 Help for the meaning of each parameter when you configure a service.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE2 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT2 as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Set Entry Detection of PORT2 to Disabled.
6. Click Apply.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports as follows:
1. Select Internal Port. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Set Entry Detection of VCTRUNK1
to Disabled.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 as follows:
l Mapping Protocol: GFP
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the LCAS tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 as follows
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
6. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure bound paths as follows:
1. In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters in the dialog box as follows:

4-96 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1


l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-1–VC12-5 in Available Timeslots. Click .


4. Click OK.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE2 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. Set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the service from F1 to F2:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Activate Immediately: Yes
5. Click OK.

Step 5 To create the EPLAN services, do as follows:


1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New and the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.
3. Set VB Name to VB1.
4. Set VB Type to 802.1d.
5. Click Configure Mounted Port and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog box is
displayed.

6. Set VB Mount Port to PORT2 and VCTRUNK1. Then, click .


7. Click OK.
8. Click OK in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box.

----End

4.9.6 Configuring the Data of NE4


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE4.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

NOTE

The method of configuring the data of NE4 is the same as the method of configuring the data of NE2,
except that the parameter settings are different. For the parameter settings, see 4.9.2 Engineering
Planning. For the procedures, see 4.9.5 Configuring the Data of NE2.

4.10 Configuring the 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Service


by Using the Per-NE Configuration Function
The EVPLAN service implements the dynamic sharing of the Ethernet service bandwidth
between multiple points, thus meeting the requirements of the dynamic features of the data
services and saving the bandwidth resources. You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based
EVPLAN service on the T2000 by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration
function. This topic describes how to configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN service by
using the per-NE configuration function.
4.10.1 Engineering Requirements
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
4.10.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
4.10.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the EVPLAN service by using the per-NE configuration
function on the T2000.
4.10.4 Configuring the Data of NE3
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.
4.10.5 Configuring the Data of NE2
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.
4.10.6 Configuring the Data of NE4
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE4.

4.10.1 Engineering Requirements


In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
The requirements for the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
l The three branches of user F are located at NE2, NE3, and NE4. The three branches must
form a LAN and share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The three branches of user G are located at NE2, NE3, and NE4. The three branches must
form a LAN and share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The service of user F must be isolated from the service of user G.
l The Ethernet equipment of user F and user G provide 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet
ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation.

4.10.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
The engineering design department outputs the following engineering information based on the
engineering information described in Chapter 1:

4-98 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Networking diagram
l Board layout of each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-46 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

Figure 4-46 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

NE1
T2000

G3
PORT3
NE2
PORT3
STM-4 two-fiber
G1 bidirectional MSP ring
PORT2
PORT2
NE4 NE5
F3
F1
NE3
PORT3 PORT2

VCTRUNK

G2 F2

Board Information of Each NE


Based on the service type and the traffic volume, one EMS1 and one ETFS8 board are added to
NE2, NE3, and NE4. Other NEs require no new boards. Figure 4-47 shows the board layout of
NE2 and NE3. Figure 4-48 shows the board layout of NE4.

Figure 4-47 Board layout of NE 2 and NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C M T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S S 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 1 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-48 Board layout of NE4


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U
1 1 S S S F X
S
4 4 S
1 C PIU
A A
C 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-49 shows the service configuration diagram of NE2, NE3, and NE4.

Figure 4-49 Service configuration diagram

VCTRUNK PORT
PORT VCTRUNK
VB1 PORT2
F1
VCTRUNK1
VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5
PORT2 VCTRUNK1
F2 PORT3
VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5 G1
VCTRUNK2 VB2
VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC12-10
VCTRUNK2
VB1 VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC12-10

NE2
PORT VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK PORT

VB1 PORT2
PORT3
G2 VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK1
F3
VC4-1: VC12-11 to VC12-15
VC4-1: VC12-1 tp VC12-5
VCTRUNK4 PORT3
VB2 VC4-1: VC12-16 to VC12-20
VCTRUNK2 G3
VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC12-10
VB2
SDH
NE3
NE4

NOTE

l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the ETFS8 board.
l On the EMS1, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only and VCTRUNK13 to
VCTRUNK24 can be bound with VC4-2 only.
l Paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2. But paths at only one of the two levels
can be bound in a VC-4.

Table 4-29 shows the connection relation of the Ethernet service of company F. Table 4-30
shows the connection relation of the Ethernet service of company G.

4-100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Table 4-29 Connection relation of the Ethernet service of company F

Item F

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access

PORT VLAN ID 100 (set according to the requirement of the client)

VB name VB1

Bridge type 802.1q

Bridge switch mode IVL/Ingress filter enable

VB mount port PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

NE NE2 NE4

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access Access

PORT VLAN ID 100 100

VB name VB1 VB1

Bridge switch mode 802.1q 802.1q

VB mount port IVL/Ingress filter enable IVL/Ingress filter enable

Mount port PORT2, VCTRUNK1 PORT2, VCTRUNK1

Table 4-30 Connection relation of the Ethernet service of company G

Item G

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-3

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Item G

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-11–VC12-15 VC4-1: VC12-16–VC12-20

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access

PORT VLAN ID 200 (set according to the requirement of the client)

VB name VB2

Bridge type 802.1q

Bridge switch mode IVL/Ingress filter enable

VB mount port PORT3, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4

NE NE2 NE4

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-3 9-EMS1-3

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access Access

PORT VLAN ID 200 200

VB name VB2 VB2

Bridge switch mode 802.1q 802.1q

VB mount port IVL/Ingress filter enable IVL/Ingress filter enable

Mount port PORT3, VCTRUNK2 PORT3, VCTRUNK2

Table 4-31 is the forwarding filtering table of NE2, NE3 and NE4.

Table 4-31 VLAN filtering table

Company NE VB VLAN ID Forwarding Port

F NE2 VB1 100 PORT2, VCTRUNK1

NE3 VB1 100 PORT2, VCTRUNK1,


VCTRUNK2

NE4 VB1 100 PORT2, VCTRUNK1

4-102 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Company NE VB VLAN ID Forwarding Port

G NE2 VB2 200 PORT3, VCTRUNK2

NE3 VB2 200 PORT3, VCTRUNK3,


VCTRUNK4

NE4 VB2 200 PORT3, VCTRUNK2

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 4-50 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.

Figure 4-50 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1
Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-128-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC12:1-5 VC12:1-5
9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1:
2#VC4
VC12:1-5 VC12:1-5 VC12:6-10 VC12:1-5

VC12:6-10 VC12:6-10
9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1:
VC12:6-10 VC12:11-15 VC12:16-20 VC12:6-10

Forward

Add/Drop

9E: 9-EMS1

4.10.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the EVPLAN service by using the per-NE configuration
function on the T2000.
The EVPLAN service implements the dynamic sharing of the Ethernet service bandwidth
between multiple points, thus meeting the requirements of the dynamic features of the data
services and saving the bandwidth resources.

NOTE

This topic describes the procedures and precautions. For configuring Ethernet services on the T2000. For
details, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Operation Guide for SDH.

Table 4-32 provides the process of configuring the EVPLAN service on the T2000.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Table 4-32 Process of configuring the EVPLAN service

Proc Operation Remarks


edur
e

1 Creating a board For details, see 4.1.4 Creating a


Board.

2 Configuring port attributes of the Ethernet -


board and bound paths

3 Creating a cross-connection between the -


Ethernet board and the line board

4 Creating the EVPLAN service -

5 Creating the VLAN filtering table -

6 Enabling the STP (if the service is This operation is optional. See 7
configured in a ring) Configuring the STP or RSTP.

7 Configuring the QoS parameters of the This operation is optional. See 4.5.4
service (if required) Configuring the Data of NE2.

4.10.4 Configuring the Data of NE3


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPLAN function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

The method of configuring the data of NE3 is the same as the method of configuring the data of NE2,
except that the parameter settings are different.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Ethernet ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE3 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface. Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT2 and PORT3
as follows:

4-104 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of PORT2 and PORT3 as follows:
l TAG: Access
l Default VLAN ID for PORT2: 100
l Default VLAN ID for PORT3: 200
l Entry Detection: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
6. Click Apply.
7. Choose Internal Port > LCAS and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1–VCTRUNK4 as
follows:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
8. Click Apply.
9. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1–VCTRUNK4 as
follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled

Step 2 Configure bound paths as follows:


1. In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1–VCTRUNK4, set the parameters in the dialog
box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-1–VC12-5 in Available Timeslots. Click .


l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-6–VC12-10 in Available Timeslots. Click .


l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK3
l Level: VC12-xv

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-11–VC12-15 in Available Timeslots. Click .


l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK4
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-16–VC12-20 in Available Timeslots. Click .


4. Click OK.
Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE3 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. Set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the service from F2 to F1:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Activate Immediately: Yes
5. Click Apply.
6. Set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the service from F2 to F3:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 6–10
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Activate Immediately: Yes
7. Click OK.
8. Refer to Steps 3–7 and see Figure 4-50 to create the service between the branches of
company G.
Step 4 Create the EVPLAN service as follows:

4-106 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New and the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.
3. Set VB Name to VB1.
4. Set VB Type to 802.1q.
5. Click Configure Mounted Port and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog box is
displayed.

6. Set VB Mount Port to PORT2, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Then, click .


7. Click Apply in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box.

8. Set VB Name to VB2.


9. Set VB Type to 802.1q.
10. Click Configure Mounted Port and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog box is
displayed.

11. Set VB Mount Port to PORT3, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. Then, click .
12. Click OK in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box.

Step 5 Create a VLAN forwarding filtering table as follows:


1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function
Tree. Click the VLAN Filtering tab.
NOTE

If there are multiple VBs, select the target VB for which the VLAN filtering table needs to be created.
Then, click the VLAN Filtering tab.
2. Configure the VLAN filtering table of company F. Select VB1. Click New and the Create
VLAN dialog box is displayed.
3. Set the following parameters in the Create VLAN dialog box:

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l VLAN ID: 100


l Selected forwarding ports: PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2

4. Click OK.
5. Configure the VLAN filtering table of company G. Select VB2. Click New and the Create
VLAN dialog box is displayed.
6. Set the following parameters in the Create VLAN dialog box:
l VLAN ID: 200
l Selected forwarding ports: PORT3, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4
7. Click OK.

----End

For the parameters to be set for configuring Ethernet LAN services, refer to Table 4-28

Table 4-33 Parameters for configuring the VLAN filtering table

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

VLAN ID 1–4095 - Specifies the VLAN ID of the


forwarding filtering table.

Forwarding Port - - Specifies the physical port for


forwarding the data.

4-108 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4.10.5 Configuring the Data of NE2


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.

NOTE

The method of configuring the data of NE2 is the same as the method of configuring the data of NE3,
except that the parameter settings are different. For the parameter settings, see 4.10.2 Engineering
Planning. For the procedures, see 4.10.4 Configuring the Data of NE3.

4.10.6 Configuring the Data of NE4


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE4.

NOTE

The method of configuring the data of NE4 is the same as the method of configuring the data of NE3,
except that the parameter settings are different. For the parameter settings, see 4.10.2 Engineering
Planning. For the procedures, see 4.10.4 Configuring the Data of NE3.

4.11 Configuring the 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Service


by Using the Trail Function
The EVPLAN service implements the dynamic sharing of the Ethernet service bandwidth
between multiple points, thus meeting the requirements of the dynamic features of the data
services and saving the bandwidth resources. You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based
EVPLAN service on the T2000 by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration
function. This topicdescribes how to configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN service by
using the trail function.
4.11.1 Engineering Requirements
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
4.11.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
4.11.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the EPLAN service by using the trail function on the
T2000.
4.11.4 Creating a Trunk Link
This topic describes how to create a trunk link when an EVPLAN service is configured by using
the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.
4.11.5 Creating an EVPLAN Trail
This topic describes how to create an EPLAN trail when an EPLAN service is configured by
using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.

4.11.1 Engineering Requirements


In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.

The requirements for the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.

l The three branches of user F are located at NE2, NE3, and NE4. The three branches must
form a LAN and share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l The three branches of user G are located at NE2, NE3, and NE4. The three branches must
form a LAN and share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The service of user F must be isolated from the service of user G.
l The Ethernet equipment of user F and user G provide 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet
ports of which the working mode is auto-negotiation.

4.11.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
The engineering design department outputs the following engineering information based on the
engineering information described in Chapter 1:
l Networking diagram
l Board layout of each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-51 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

Figure 4-51 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

NE1
T2000

G3
PORT3
NE2
PORT3
STM-4 two-fiber
G1 bidirectional MSP ring
PORT2
PORT2
NE4 NE5
F3
F1
NE3
PORT3 PORT2

VCTRUNK

G2 F2

Board Information of Each NE


Based on the service type and the traffic volume, one EMS1 and one ETFS8 board are added to
NE2, NE3, and NE4. Other NEs require no new boards. Figure 4-52 shows the board layout of
NE2 and NE3. Figure 4-53 shows the board layout of NE4.

4-110 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-52 Board layout of NE 2 and NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C M T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S S 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 1 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Figure 4-53 Board layout of NE4


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U
1 1 S S S F X
S
4 4 S
1 C PIU
A A
C 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-54 shows the service configuration diagram of NE2, NE3, and NE4.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-54 Service configuration diagram

VCTRUNK PORT
PORT VCTRUNK
VB1 PORT2
F1
VCTRUNK1
VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5
PORT2 VCTRUNK1
F2 PORT3
VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5 G1
VCTRUNK2 VB2
VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC12-10
VCTRUNK2
VB1 VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC12-10

NE2
PORT VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK PORT

VB1 PORT2
PORT3
G2 VCTRUNK3
VCTRUNK1
F3
VC4-1: VC12-11 to VC12-15
VC4-1: VC12-1 tp VC12-5
VCTRUNK4 PORT3
VB2 VC4-1: VC12-16 to VC12-20
VCTRUNK2 G3
VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC12-10
VB2
SDH
NE3
NE4

NOTE

l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the ETFS8 board.
l On the EMS1, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only and VCTRUNK13 to
VCTRUNK24 can be bound with VC4-2 only.
l Paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2. But paths at only one of the two levels
can be bound in a VC-4.

Table 4-34 shows the connection relation of the Ethernet service of company F. Table 4-35
shows the connection relation of the Ethernet service of company G.

Table 4-34 Connection relation of the Ethernet service of company F


Item F

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access

PORT VLAN ID 100 (set according to the requirement of the client)

VB name VB1

Bridge type 802.1q

Bridge switch mode IVL/Ingress filter enable

VB mount port PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

4-112 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Item F

NE NE2 NE4

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access Access

PORT VLAN ID 100 100

VB name VB1 VB1

Bridge switch mode 802.1q 802.1q

VB mount port IVL/Ingress filter enable IVL/Ingress filter enable

Mount port PORT2, VCTRUNK1 PORT2, VCTRUNK1

Table 4-35 Connection relation of the Ethernet service of company G


Item G

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-3

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-11–VC12-15 VC4-1: VC12-16–VC12-20

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access

PORT VLAN ID 200 (set according to the requirement of the client)

VB name VB2

Bridge type 802.1q

Bridge switch mode IVL/Ingress filter enable

VB mount port PORT3, VCTRUNK3, VCTRUNK4

NE NE2 NE4

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-3 9-EMS1-3

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Item G

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2

Bound bandwidth 5xVC-12 5xVC-12

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access Access

PORT VLAN ID 200 200

VB name VB2 VB2

Bridge switch mode 802.1q 802.1q

VB mount port IVL/Ingress filter enable IVL/Ingress filter enable

Mount port PORT3, VCTRUNK2 PORT3, VCTRUNK2

Table 4-36 is the forwarding filtering table of NE2, NE3 and NE4.

Table 4-36 VLAN filtering table


Company NE VB VLAN ID Forwarding Port

F NE2 VB1 100 PORT2, VCTRUNK1

NE3 VB1 100 PORT2, VCTRUNK1,


VCTRUNK2

NE4 VB1 100 PORT2, VCTRUNK1

G NE2 VB2 200 PORT3, VCTRUNK2

NE3 VB2 200 PORT3, VCTRUNK3,


VCTRUNK4

NE4 VB2 200 PORT3, VCTRUNK2

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 4-55 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.

4-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-55 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services


Ring
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1
Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-128-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC12:1-5 VC12:1-5
9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1:
2#VC4
VC12:1-5 VC12:1-5 VC12:6-10 VC12:1-5

VC12:6-10 VC12:6-10
9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1:
VC12:6-10 VC12:11-15 VC12:16-20 VC12:6-10

Forward

Add/Drop

9E: 9-EMS1

4.11.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the EPLAN service by using the trail function on the
T2000.
NOTE

Ethernet services can be created by using the trail function or by using the per-NE configuration function.
If you purchase the license with trail function, you can create Ethernet service by using the trail function.
Otherwise, you can only create Ethernet services by using the per-NE configuration function.

Table 4-37 lists the flow for configuring the EVPLAN service.

Table 4-37 Process of configuring the EPLAN service by using the trail function

Procedu Operation Remarks


re

1 Creating a server trail See 2.15.1 Creating a VC-4 Server Trail.

2 Creating a trunk link -

3 Creating an EVPLAN -
service trail

4 Configuring the QoS This operation is optional. See 4.5.4 Configuring


parameters of the service (if the Data of NE2.
required)

4.11.4 Creating a Trunk Link


This topic describes how to create a trunk link when an EVPLAN service is configured by using
the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPLAN function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The license that supports the trial function must be available.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > Trunk Link Creation from the Main Menu.

Step 2 See Figure 4-54 to create the trunk link from F2 to F1. Set Bandwidth to 5xVC12 in the
displayed interface.

Step 3 Click Browse. Select the source NE (NE3). Select the EMS1 board. Select 1 for VCTRUNK
Port, and then select VC4:1-VC12:1–VC4:1-VC12:5 for Available Timeslot.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Click Browse. Select the sink NE (NE2). Select the EMS1 board. Select 1 for VCTRUNK
Port, and then select VC4:1-VC12:1–VC4:1-VC12:5 for Available Timeslot.

Step 6 Select the Activate the trail check box, and adopt default settings for other parameters.

Step 7 Click Apply to create the trunk link from NE3 to NE2.

Step 8 Create the trunk links from F2 to F3, from G2 to G1, and from G2 to G3 in the same manner.

----End

4.11.5 Creating an EVPLAN Trail


This topic describes how to create an EPLAN trail when an EPLAN service is configured by
using the trail function, including the configuration steps and the parameter setting.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EPLAN function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l The license that supports the trial function must be available.
l The fibers and the protection subnet must be created.
l The trunk link must be created.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Trail > Ethernet Trail Creation > EPLAN Creation from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Set the parameters regarding the source in the displayed Create EPLAN window. To create the
Ethernet LAN service of company F, double-click the nodes to be added into the EPLAN. In
the window that is displayed, select PORT2 and click . Then, click OK.

4-116 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Step 3 Select the trunk link created previously from Trunk Link Route Strategy. Click Next. Set the
parameters of PORT2 on NE2, NE3, and NE4 in the Port Attribute Setting window:
l TAG: Access
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled

Step 4 Click Add in the VLAN configuration window, and set the following parameter in the VLAN
Configuration for Ethernet Trail window:
l VLAN ID: 100

l Select the mounted port and click .

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 After the setting, click Next.

Step 7 Set the EPLAN name. Select the Activate the trail check box. Click Finish.

Step 8 Refer to Steps 1–7 to create the EPLAN service of company G.

----End

4.12 Configuring the MPLS-Based EVPLAN Service by


Using the Per-NE Configuration Function
The EVPLAN service uses the MPLS technology. The transmission efficiency is lower than the
transmission efficiency of the EPLAN service and the configuration is more complex. Therefore,
the EPLAN is recommended unless EVPLAN needs to be used to meet certain special
requirements. You can configure the MPLS-based EVPLAN service on the T2000 by using the
per-NE configuration function.
4.12.1 Engineering Requirements
In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
4.12.2 Engineering Planning
The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
4.12.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the EVPLAN service on the T2000.
4.12.4 Configuring the Data of NE1
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.
4.12.5 Configuring the Data of NE2
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.12.6 Configuring the Data of NE3


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.
4.12.7 Configuring the Data of NE4
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE4.

4.12.1 Engineering Requirements


In the example provided in Chapter 2, Ethernet services need to be added.
The requirements for the Ethernet services are listed in this topic.
l Company A has three branches that are located at NE1, NE2 and NE3. Data must be shared
among the branches.
l Company B has three branches that are located at NE1, NE2 and NE3. Data must be shared
among the branches.
l Companies A and B must share a bandwidth of 10 Mbit/s.
l The Ethernet equipment of companies A and B provides 10M/100M autosensing electrical
ports and adopts the same VLAN.

4.12.2 Engineering Planning


The engineering design department conducts planning based on the requirements.
The engineering design department outputs the following engineering information based on the
engineering information described in Chapter 1:
l Networking diagram
l Board layout of each NE
l Service configuration diagram of each NE
l Timeslot allocation diagram

Networking Diagram
Figure 4-56 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

Figure 4-56 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

PORT2 PORT3
NE1

PORT2
STM-4 two-fiber NE4
NE2 bidirectional MSP ring

PORT3

NE3

PORT2 PORT3
Company Company
A B

4-118 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Board Information of Each NE


Based on the service type and the traffic volume, one EMS1 and one ETFS8 board are added to
NE1, NE3, and NE3. Other NEs require no new boards. Figure 4-57 shows the board layout of
NE1. Figure 4-58 shows the board layout of NE2 and NE3.

Figure 4-57 Board layout of NE1


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU E
T T P P X X E P C A
T
7 7 T T C C M T U
F
5 5 1 1 S S S 1 S X
4 4 S
S S 1 P C PIU
A A 8
C

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Figure 4-58 Board layout of NE2 and NE3


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U
1 1 S S S F X
S
4 4 S
1 C PIU
A A
C 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


Figure 4-59 shows the service configuration diagram of NE1, NE2, and NE3.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-59 Service configuration


NE1
Port2 Port3

VB1 VB2

LP

VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK

Tu
e l

nn
nn

e
Tu

l
VB1 VB1
NE2 NE3
Port2 Port2

Port3 Tunnel Port3

VB2 LP VB2
LP
VCTRUNK

Figure 4-60 NE Service Configuration Diagram

PORT VB logical port VB logical port VCTRUNK

lp2 LSP1 VCTRUNK1

VLAN 11 2 lp1
Party A VB 1
VCTRUNK2
lp3 LSP2
P3
LS

VLAN 11 3 lp1 lp2


Party B SP4
VB 2 L

lp3

LSP1: tunnel: 20 VC: 30 LSP3: tunnel: 20 VC: 32


LSP2: tunnel: 21 VC: 31 LSP4: tunnel: 21 VC: 33

LSP: link swich path

4-120 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

NOTE

l PORT1 is the GE port on the EMS1 board. PORT2 to PORT7 are the FE ports on the ETFS8 board.
l On the EMS1, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK12 can be bound with VC4-1 only and VCTRUNK13 to
VCTRUNK24 can be bound with VC4-2 only.
l Paths of VC-3 or VC-12 level can be bound in VC4-1 or VC4-2. But paths at only one of the two levels
can be bound in a VC-4.

Table 4-38 lists the mapping relation of Ethernet service connection.

Table 4-38 Ethernet service connection

Item A B

NE NE1

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

VCTRUNK (bound VCTRUNK1 (VC4-1:VC12-1– VCTRUNK1 (VC4-1:VC12-1–


timeslot) VC12-5), VCTRUNK2 VC12-5), VCTRUNK2
(VC4-1:VC12-6–VC12-10) (VC4-1:VC12-6–VC12-10)

Working mode of Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation


PORT

Tag flag of PORT Tag aware Tag aware

PORT VLAN ID 11 11

VB name VB1 VB2

Bridge type 802.1q 802.1q

Bridge switch mode IVL/Ingress filter enable IVL/Ingress filter enable

VB mount porta PORT2, VCTRUNK1 ({20, PORT3, VCTRUNK1 ({20, 32},


31}, {20, 31}), VCTRUNK2 {20, 32}), VCTRUNK2 ({21,
({21, 31}, {21, 31}) 33}, {21, 33})

NE NE2

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

VCTRUNK (bound VCTRUNK1 (VC4-1:VC12-1– VCTRUNK1 (VC4-1:VC12-1–


timeslot) VC12-5), VCTRUNK2 VC12-5), VCTRUNK2
(VC4-1:VC12-6–VC12-10) (VC4-1:VC12-6–VC12-10)

Working mode of Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation


PORT

Tag flag of PORT Tag aware Tag aware

PORT VLAN ID 11 11

VB name VB1 VB2

Bridge type 802.1q 802.1q

Bridge switch mode IVL/Ingress filter enable IVL/Ingress filter enable

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Item A B

VB mount porta PORT2, VCTRUNK1 ({20, PORT3, VCTRUNK1 ({20, 32},


30}, {20, 30}), VCTRUNK2 {20, 32}), VCTRUNK2 ({22,
({22, 31}, {22, 31}) 33}, {22, 33})

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-3

VCTRUNK (bound VCTRUNK1 (VC4-1:VC12-1– VCTRUNK1 (VC4-1:VC12-1–


timeslot) VC12-5), VCTRUNK2 VC12-5), VCTRUNK2
(VC4-1:VC12-6–VC12-10) (VC4-1:VC12-6–VC12-10)

Working mode of Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation


PORT

Tag flag of PORT Tag aware Tag aware

PORT VLAN ID 11 11

VB name VB1 VB2

Bridge type 802.1q 802.1q

Bridge switch mode IVL/Ingress filter enable IVL/Ingress filter enable

VB mount porta PORT2, VCTRUNK1 ({22, PORT3, VCTRUNK1 ({22, 32},


30}, {22, 30}), VCTRUNK2 {20, 32}), VCTRUNK2 ({21,
({21, 31}, {21, 31}) 33}, {21, 33})

"VCTRUNK1 ({21, 31}, {21, 31})" represents the following:

The logical port of VCTRUNK1 is the mounted port.

Both the uplink and downlink logical ports of VCTRUNK1 bear the service flow in Tunnel 21
and VC 31.

Table 4-39 is the VLAN filtering table of NE1, NE2, and NE3.

Table 4-39 VLAN filtering table

NE VB VLAN ID Forwarding Port

NE1 VB1 11 PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

VB2 11 PORT3, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

NE2 VB1 11 PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

VB2 11 PORT3, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

NE3 VB1 11 PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

VB2 11 PORT3, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

4-122 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 4-61 shows the SDH timeslot allocation.

Figure 4-61 SDH timeslot allocation for Ethernet services


Ring
Station
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1
Timeslot 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1 27-OSB4A-1

1#VC4

VC12:1-5 VC12:1-5 VC12:1-5


2#VC4
9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1: 9E:VC4-1:
VC12:1-5 VC12:1-5 VC12:6-10 VC12:1-5 VC12:6-10 VC12:6-10

Forward

Add/Drop

9E: 9-EMS1

4.12.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the EVPLAN service on the T2000.
NOTE

This topic describes the procedures and precautions for configuring Ethernet services on the T2000. For
details, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Operation Guide for SDH.

Table 4-40 lists the flow for configuring the EVPLAN service.

Table 4-40 Process of configuring the EVPLAN service

Proce Operation Remarks


dure

1 Creating a board For details, see 4.1.4 Creating a


Board.

2 Configuring port attributes of the Ethernet -


board and bound paths

3 Creating the Cross-Connect Between an -


Ethernet Board and a Line Board

4 Creating an EVPLAN Trail -

5 Creating the VLAN filtering table -

6 Configuring the QoS parameters of the service This operation is optional. See
(if required) 4.5.4 Configuring the Data of
NE2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.12.4 Configuring the Data of NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE1.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPLAN function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
NOTE

See the OptiX iManager T2000 Help for the meaning of each parameter.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports as follows:
1. Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface . Click .
3. Choose External Port > Basic Attributes and set the parameters of PORT2 and PORT3
as follows:
l Enabled/Disabled: Enabled
l Working Mode: Auto-Negotiation
l Maximum Frame Length: Set it according to the connected Ethernet equipment, and
adopt the default value of 1522 in normal cases.
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of PORT2 and PORT3 as follows:
l TAG: Tag Aware
l Entry Detection: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click the Network Attributes tab and set Port Type of PORT2 and PORT3 to PE.
8. Click Apply.
Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports as follows:
1. Choose Internal Port > LCAS and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2
as follows:
l Enabling LCAS: Enabled
l For other parameters, adopt the default values.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as
follows:

4-124 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l TAG: Tag Aware


l Entry Detection: Enabled
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the Network Attributes tab and set the attributes of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2
as follows:
l Port Type: P
l Encapsulation Format of P Port: MartinioE
6. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure bound paths as follows:
1. In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configure, and the bound path configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. To configure bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters In the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-1–VC12-5 in Available Timeslots. Click .


4. Click Apply.
5. To set a bound path for VCTRUNK2, set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Select VC12-6–VC12-10 in Available Timeslots. Click .


6. Click OK.
Step 4 Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet boards to the SDH line boards.
1. Select NE1 from the Object Tree.
2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
4. Set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the SDH service from NE1 to NE2:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l Activate Immediately: Yes


5. Click OK.
6. Set the following parameters in the dialog box to create the SDH service from NE1 to NE3:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 6–10
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Activate Immediately: Yes
7. Click OK.
Step 5 Create the EVPLAN service as follows:
1. Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet LAN Service.
2. Click New and the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Create the
EVPLAN service of company A on NE1 as follows.
3. Set VB Name to VB1.
4. Click Configure Mounted Port and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
5. According to the NE service configuration diagram, select PORT2, VCTRUNK1, and
VCTRUNK2 for Available Mounted Ports. Click .
6. Click OK.
7. In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box, set the parameters of the VB mounted
port:
l Uplink Tunnel: 20 (VCTRUNK1), 21 (VCTRUNK2)
l Downlink Tunnel: 20 (VCTRUNK1), 21 (VCTRUNK2)
l Uplink VC: 30 (VCTRUNK1), 31 (VCTRUNK2)
l Downlink VC: 30 (VCTRUNK1), 31 (VCTRUNK2
8. Click OK.
9. Click New and the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Create the
EVPLAN service of company A on NE1 as follows:
10. Set VB Name to VB2.
11. Click Configure Mounted Port and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
12. According to the NE service configuration diagram, select PORT3, VCTRUNK1. and
VCTRUNK2 for Available Mounted Ports. Click .
13. Click OK.
14. In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box, set the parameters of the VB mounted
port:

4-126 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Uplink Tunnel: 20 (VCTRUNK1), 21 (VCTRUNK2)


l Downlink Tunnel: 20 (VCTRUNK1), 21 (VCTRUNK2)
l Uplink VC: 32 (VCTRUNK1), 33 (VCTRUNK2)
l Downlink VC: 32 (VCTRUNK1), 33 (VCTRUNK2)
15. Click OK.

Step 6 Create a VLAN forwarding filtering table as follows:


1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function
Tree. Click the VLAN tab.
2. If there are multiple VBs, select the target VB for which the VLAN filtering table needs to
be created. Then, click the VLAN tab.
3. Click Create and the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed.
4. Set the following parameters in the Create VLAN dialog box:
l VB: 1-VB1
l VLAN ID: 11
l Selected Forwarding Ports: PORT3, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2
5. Click OK.

----End

4.12.5 Configuring the Data of NE2


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2.

NOTE

The method of configuring the data of NE2 is the same as the method of configuring the data of NE1,
except that the parameter settings are different. For the parameter settings, see 4.12.2 Engineering
Planning. For the procedures, see 4.12.4 Configuring the Data of NE1.

4.12.6 Configuring the Data of NE3


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE3.

NOTE

The method of configuring the data of NE3 is the same as the method of configuring the data of NE1,
except that the parameter settings are different. For the parameter settings, see 4.12.2 Engineering
Planning. For the procedures, see 4.12.4 Configuring the Data of NE1.

4.12.7 Configuring the Data of NE4


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE4.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet boards must support the EVPLAN function and must be inserted in the correct
slots.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE4 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
Step 2 According to Figure 4-61, configure the service from NE1 to NE3 that passes through NE4:
from timeslots 1–5 of the second VC-4 on the 27-OSB4A optical interface board to timeslots
1-5 of the second VC-4 on the 28-OSB4A optical interface board.
Step 3 Click Create. Set the following parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-2
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

4-128 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring Auxiliary Services

5 Configuring Auxiliary Services

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to configure the broadcast data service and the F1 data service on the
T2000. It also describes the related engineering requirements and engineering information.

5.1 Configuring Broadcast Services


The OptiX OSN 2000 uses the RS232 or RS422 port to achieve the universal asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (UART) full-duplex communication. The data is transmitted transparently.
Hence, the port rate or the transmission control protocols need not be configured. The highest
bit rate can be 19.2 kbit/s. The communication mode can be configured to either point-to-point
or point-to-multipoint. The OptiX OSN 2000 uses overhead bytes (Serial1–Serial4) as the
broadcast data communication channel to broadcast the data that is received from the data port
to other NEs over the fiber.
5.2 Configuring F1 Data Services
The AUX board of the OptiX OSN 2000 provides a 64 kbit/s synchronous data port (F1 port).
The F1 port provides a 64 kbit/s channel for transparent data transmission by using the F1 byte.
The F1 port can be used for point-to-point transmission of 64 kbit/s data.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
5 Configuring Auxiliary Services Configuration Guide

5.1 Configuring Broadcast Services


The OptiX OSN 2000 uses the RS232 or RS422 port to achieve the universal asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (UART) full-duplex communication. The data is transmitted transparently.
Hence, the port rate or the transmission control protocols need not be configured. The highest
bit rate can be 19.2 kbit/s. The communication mode can be configured to either point-to-point
or point-to-multipoint. The OptiX OSN 2000 uses overhead bytes (Serial1–Serial4) as the
broadcast data communication channel to broadcast the data that is received from the data port
to other NEs over the fiber.

CAUTION
In the point-to-multipoint mode, only one slave station can transmit data to the master station at
a time.

5.1.1 Engineering Requirements


As described in Chapter 2, broadcast data services need to be added.
5.1.2 Engineering Planning
The overhead bytes, broadcast data source, and broadcast data sink should be determined
according to the service requirements.
5.1.3 Configuration Process
The broadcast data ports are used to access the collected monitoring data and report it to the NE
software. This topic describes how to configure broadcast data services on the T2000.

5.1.1 Engineering Requirements


As described in Chapter 2, broadcast data services need to be added.
The requirements for broadcast data services are listed in this topic.
l NE1 is connected to the monitor server through the S1 port.
l NE2, NE3, and NE4 are connected to the environment monitor through the S1 ports.
l The monitor server broadcasts commands to the environment monitors of NE2–NE4. They
serve as slave stations and report the data collected locally to the monitor server.
The environment monitor must meet the following requirements:
l The port must be of the RS-232 level, where logic 1 ranges from –5 V to –15 V and logic
0 ranges from +5 V to +15 V.
l The port must be of the RS-232 high level (about –9 V) when the data is not transmitted.
l Only one slave station transmits the data to the master station at a time.

5.1.2 Engineering Planning


The overhead bytes, broadcast data source, and broadcast data sink should be determined
according to the service requirements.
Table 5-1 provides the engineering planning information.

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring Auxiliary Services

Table 5-1 NE parameters

NE Overhead Broadcast Data Source Broadcast Data Sink


Byte

NE1 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 27-OSB4A-1, 28-OSB4A-1

NE2 SERIAL1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1, S1

NE3 SERIAL1 27-OSB4A-1 S1

NE4 SERIAL1 28-OSB4A-1 S1

5.1.3 Configuration Process


The broadcast data ports are used to access the collected monitoring data and report it to the NE
software. This topic describes how to configure broadcast data services on the T2000.

Prerequisite
l The engineering planning operations must be complete.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
The broadcast data ports should not form a loop. Certain optical ports are not configured into
the broadcast data ports.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 Select NE1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree.

Step 3 Set the following parameters in the Broadcast Data Port tab:
l Overhead Byte: SERIAL1
l Working Mode: RS232
l Broadcast Data Source: SERIAL1
l Broadcast Data Sink: 27-OSB4A-1, 28-OSB4A-1
NOTE

"SERIAL1" stands for serial port S1. "SERIAL2" stands for serial port S2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
5 Configuring Auxiliary Services Configuration Guide

Step 4 Click Apply.


Step 5 Refer to Table 5-1 and configure the broadcast data services of NE2, NE3, and NE4 in the same
manner.

----End

5.2 Configuring F1 Data Services


The AUX board of the OptiX OSN 2000 provides a 64 kbit/s synchronous data port (F1 port).
The F1 port provides a 64 kbit/s channel for transparent data transmission by using the F1 byte.
The F1 port can be used for point-to-point transmission of 64 kbit/s data.
5.2.1 Engineering Requirements
As described in Chapter 2, F1 data services need to be added.
5.2.2 Engineering Planning
The data channels to be cross-connected on each NE need to be determined according to the
service requirements.
5.2.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure F1 data services on the T2000.

5.2.1 Engineering Requirements


As described in Chapter 2, F1 data services need to be added.
The requirements for the F1 data services are listed in this topic.
l NE1 is connected to one set of communication equipment through the F1 port. The port of
the communication equipment must comply with the features of the E0 port defined in ITU-
T G.703.
l NE3 is connected to another set of communication equipment through the F1 port. The port
of the communication equipment must comply with the features of the E0 port defined in
ITU-T G.703.

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring Auxiliary Services

l Point-to-point communication is required between the two sets of communication


equipment.

5.2.2 Engineering Planning


The data channels to be cross-connected on each NE need to be determined according to the
service requirements.

Table 5-2 provides the engineering planning information.

Table 5-2 NE parameters

NE Number Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2

NE1 1 F1 28-OSB4A-1

NE2 1 27-OSB4A-1 28-OSB4A-1

NE3 1 F1 27-OSB4A-1

5.2.3 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure F1 data services on the T2000.

Prerequisite
l The engineering planning operations must be complete.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 Select NE1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree.

Step 3 Set the following parameters in the F1 Data Port tab:


l Data Channel 1: F1
l Data Channel 2: 28-OSB4AA-1
NOTE

In Available Data Channel, select Data Channel 1 and then select Data Channel 2.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
5 Configuring Auxiliary Services Configuration Guide

Step 4 Refer to Table 5-2 and configure the F1 data services of NE2 and NE3 in the same manner.

----End

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

6 Configuring the DCN

About This Chapter

This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data communication network (DCN)
on the T2000.
6.1 Overview
The SDH NMS communicates with the SDH NEs through the DCN. The SDH NMS can then
manage and maintain these SDH NEs.
6.2 HWECC Communication
The embedded control channel (ECC) uses the D bytes to transmit the OAM data. Thus, the
T2000 can manage NEs in an SDH network.
6.3 Configuring HWECC Communication
By default, the Huawei equipment supports the HWECC protocol and considers bytes D1 to D3
as the physical channels. If the node ID is set, the ECC communication can be performed without
any configuration when the fiber is inserted correctly. If required, modify the ECC
communication parameters at the local station. Do not modify the parameters at the remote
station. Otherwise, the ECC communication cannot be restored after it is interrupted. If you have
to modify the parameters at the remote station, start from the remote station and then to the
nearest station.
6.4 IP over DCC
The IP over DCC protocol follows the TCP/IP protocol and is applied to control remote NEs
through the Internet.
6.5 Configuring IP over DCC Communication
This topic describes how to configure the IP over DCC communication on the T2000.
6.6 OSI over DCC
The OSI over DCC protocol is used for communication in case of hybrid networking of the
Huawei equipment and the third-party equipment that support the OSI over DCC
communication.
6.7 Configuring the OSI over DCC Communication
The OSI protocol is a communication protocol. It is widely used in the SDH management
network. The OSI over DCC protocol is applied to eliminate the limit of the hybrid networking.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

The NM data can then be transparently transmitted at the network layer. Hence, the Huawei
equipment can interconnect with the third-party equipment that supports the OSI protocol.

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

6.1 Overview
The SDH NMS communicates with the SDH NEs through the DCN. The SDH NMS can then
manage and maintain these SDH NEs.
In the DCN, the NMS and NEs are considered as nodes for the DCN management network.
These nodes are connected to each other through Ethernet or DCC physical channels.
In actual network applications, the NMS and NEs may be located at different floors in the same
building, at different buildings,or even in different cities. As a result, the NMS should connect
to the NEs through the external DCN, which consists of equipment such as Lanswitch and router.
Thus, the DCN among NEs is called an internal DCN.
6.1.1 Background for the Generation of the DCN
With the scaled development of the network, the operation, administration, maintenance, and
provision (OAM&P) becomes more difficult. The DCN then requires great attention from
operators. A stable and robust DCN helps lower the operation expenditure (OPEX) for vendors.
6.1.2 DCN Solutions
Huawei equipment supports the DCN networking by using three communication protocols.

6.1.1 Background for the Generation of the DCN


With the scaled development of the network, the operation, administration, maintenance, and
provision (OAM&P) becomes more difficult. The DCN then requires great attention from
operators. A stable and robust DCN helps lower the operation expenditure (OPEX) for vendors.
In the SDH frame, D bytes are considered as the physical channels for the creation of DCN. In
this case, no specific DCN channels are required. Hence, the OPEX is minimized for the client.
If bytes D1 to D3 of the RSOH in the SDH overhead are used, a 192 kbit/s bandwidth is available
in the DCN. If bytes D4 to D12 of the MSOH in the SDH overhead are used, a 576 kbit/s
bandwidth is available in the DCN. If bytes D1 to D12 in the SDH overhead are used, a 768
kbit/s bandwidth is available in the DCN.

Figure 6-1 Positions of the D bytes in the SDH overhead

* *
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0

B1 E1 F1 RSOH
D1 D2 D3

AU PTR

B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9 MSOH
D10 D11 D12

S1 M1 E2

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

DCC Resource Management


The optical ports of the SDH equipment support the communication through channels D1 to D3
or D4 to D12. In the actual application, configure the DCC resources at each station according
to the DCC bytes that are used.
Count the number of 3-byte and 9-byte channels according to the DCC channels that are enabled
at each optical port of each station. Bytes D1 to D3 are 3-byte channels. Bytes D4 to D12 are 9-
byte channels. If the DCC communication configuration already exceeds the restriction, close
or adjust the DCCs of certain ports, depending on the actual situation.

6.1.2 DCN Solutions


Huawei equipment supports the DCN networking by using three communication protocols.
The three communication protocols are listed in this topic.
l HWECC
l IP over DCC
l OSI over DCC

The HWECC protocol is a proprietory protocol, which is developed by Huawei for the DCN
networking. This protocol features simple configuration and convenient application. As a
proprietory protocol, the HWECC protocol does not meet the management requirements when
the third-party equipment is involved.
The IP over DCC and the OSI over DCC protocols are standard communication protocols, which
are used widely. To solve the management problem when the third-party equipment is involved,
Huawei OptiX equipment can use either of the protocols. Either protocol can be selected for the
networking that involves only Huawei equipment.
If the third-party equipment that does not support either the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC
protocol is involved, the Huawei equipment can transparently transmit the OAM data of the
third-party equipment.

6.2 HWECC Communication


The embedded control channel (ECC) uses the D bytes to transmit the OAM data. Thus, the
T2000 can manage NEs in an SDH network.

6.2.1 Functions and Features


The HWECC protocol is mainly adopted to transmit the OAM data between Huawei optical
equipment.
6.2.2 Application
There are two typical applications of the HWECC protocol for the networking schemes.

6.2.1 Functions and Features


The HWECC protocol is mainly adopted to transmit the OAM data between Huawei optical
equipment.
This protocol stake does not recognize the OAM data of the third-party equipment. When the
third-party equipment is involved, the OAM data cannot be interconnected. The Huawei optical

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

equipment, however, can transparently transmit the OAM data of the third-party equipment.
Hence, the client can use the current DCC resources to manage all the equipment.

6.2.2 Application
There are two typical applications of the HWECC protocol for the networking schemes.

Application I Networking That Involves Only Huawei Equipment


Figure 6-2 shows the networking mode that involves only the Huawei equipment.

Figure 6-2 Networking that involves only Huawei equipment

HUB1 GNE1 NE6


NE6 HUB2 NE7 NE12
T2000

NE2 NE5 NE8 NE11

Network
cable NE3 NE4 NE9 NE10

Fiber Subnet 1 Subnet 2

This networking mode requires that one gateway NE (GNE) is used for the communication
between other NEs and the T2000 through the Ethernet port. The NEs communicate with each
other through fibers or Ethernet ports. The network shown in Figure 6-2 consists of two subnets.
The two subnets conduct the extended ECC communication through Ethernet ports, such as
between NE6 and NE7.

Application II Networking That Involves Huawei Equipment and Third-Party


Equipment
Figure 6-3 shows the networking mode that involves the Huawei equipment and the third-party
equipment.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-3 Networking that involves Huawei equipment and third-party equipment

HUB NE NE NE
NM of third-party
equipment

NE NE

Third-party equipment
NE
NE NE
NE
Huawei equipment

NE

In this networking mode, the OAM data of the third-party equipment should travel through the
Huawei equipment. The Huawei equipment transparently transmits the DCC. During the
transmission, Huawei equipment does not analyze the data. In the case of DCC transparent
transmission, perform the corresponding configuration at each NE along the data transmitting
trail.

6.3 Configuring HWECC Communication


By default, the Huawei equipment supports the HWECC protocol and considers bytes D1 to D3
as the physical channels. If the node ID is set, the ECC communication can be performed without
any configuration when the fiber is inserted correctly. If required, modify the ECC
communication parameters at the local station. Do not modify the parameters at the remote
station. Otherwise, the ECC communication cannot be restored after it is interrupted. If you have
to modify the parameters at the remote station, start from the remote station and then to the
nearest station.
NOTE

The parameters described in the following parts are examples. In actual applications, set the parameters
according to the network planning.

6.3.1 Creating a Gateway NE


This topic describes how to create a gateway NE on the T2000.
6.3.2 Creating a Non-Gateway NE
This topic describes how to create a non-gateway NE on the T2000.
6.3.3 Setting the NE ID
This topic describes how to set the NE ID.
6.3.4 Configuring the Extended ECC
If there are two subnets which are not connected to each other by fibers, Ethernet lines can be
adopted to establish the extended ECC communication. In this way, the T2000 can manage the
equipment in a centralized manner.
6.3.5 Querying the ECC Route

6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

You can check whether the ECC route is correct. If the ECC route is incorrect, you need to re-
configure it.
6.3.6 Configuring the DCC Rate
The DCC communication can be performed among NEs. D1–D3, D4–D12, or D1–D12 can be
set for the DCC communication at different rates. Thus, the NM requirements in the case of
complex networking can be met. When configuring DCC, you need to set DCC rate and allocate
DCC resources according to DCC channel types.
6.3.7 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission
When the networking involves Huawei equipment and the third-party equipment, the Huawei
equipment can transparently transmit the DCC bytes of the third-party equipment. Huawei
equipment also supports the adjustment of its DCC bytes and transparent transmission over the
idle DCC bytes of the third-party equipment.

6.3.1 Creating a Gateway NE


This topic describes how to create a gateway NE on the T2000.
See 2.6.1 Creating a Gateway NE: NE1.

6.3.2 Creating a Non-Gateway NE


This topic describes how to create a non-gateway NE on the T2000.
See 2.6.2 Creating Non-Gateway NEs: NE2–NE5.

6.3.3 Setting the NE ID


This topic describes how to set the NE ID.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
Modifying the NE ID may interrupt the communication.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE icon on the Main Topology, right-click, and select Attribute from the shortcut
menu.
Step 2 In the NE Attribute dialog box, click Modify NE ID. For the NE attributes, refer to Table
6-1.
Step 3 In the Modify NE ID dialog box, set New ID and New Extension ID according to the actual
engineering requirements.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Step 4 Click OK. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

----End

Parameters

Table 6-1 NE attributes

Param Value Defaul Description


eter Range t Value

ID 1–49151 - Indicates the ID of the created NE.

Extende 1–255 - Indicates the extended ID of the created NE.


d ID

Name - - Indicates the name of the created NE. The default value is
"NE + ID". The ECC protocol takes the NE ID as the
unique identification for an NE. In the T2000 interface and
databases, the NE ID is also taken as the key word for
searching. In the network planning, allocate the NE ID to
each NE. The conflict of NE IDs causes the conflict of ECC
routing. As a result, certain NEs cannot be managed.

NE Pre- Checked, Unchec If Checked is selected, the configuration data is stored


configu Unchecke ked only on the T2000 and not delivered to the NE. If
ration d Unchecked is selected, the configuration data is delivered
to the NE.

6.3.4 Configuring the Extended ECC


If there are two subnets which are not connected to each other by fibers, Ethernet lines can be
adopted to establish the extended ECC communication. In this way, the T2000 can manage the
equipment in a centralized manner.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
This operation causes resetting of the NE and affects services.

6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Communication > ECC Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select ECC Extended Mode according to the actual engineering requirements. Refer to Table
6-2 for the extended ECC parameters.
NOTE

l If Specified mode is selected, set IP and Port for the server, Opposite IP and Port for the client.
l If Auto mode is selected, all parameters are set automatically.

Step 4 Click Apply.


Step 5 In the Warning dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box
displayed, click Close.

----End

Parameters

Table 6-2 Parameters for configuring the extended ECC


Parameter Value Default Description
Range Value

ECC Auto mode, Specified If Auto mode is selected, the extended ECC
Extended Specified mode connection is automatically established. This
Mode mode mode is convenient. Extra connections,
however, are still to be established and the
resource availability is low. Hence, it is
recommended that you select Auto mode
only in the case of not more than four NEs. In
addition, two NEs can automatically establish
extended ECC communication only after the
ECC Extended Mode parameters of the two
NEs are set to Auto mode.
If Specified mode is selected, the extended
ECC is to be established between the server
and the client. The connection is highly
reliable. The bandwidth availability is high.
This mode is used to establish an extended
ECC connection in normal cases.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Parameter Value Default Description


Range Value

Specified Set Server, Set Server If Set Server is selected for the specified
mode Set Client mode, set the parameters as follows:
l "IP" indicates the IP address of the
extended ECC server NE. Click Refresh
after setting the IP address and then 0.0.0.0
should be returned.
l "Port" indicates the number of the NE port
used for the extended ECC. The number
can be any integer from 1601 to 1699.
After this parameter is set, set the opposite
NE as the client. The actual port number
should be the same as this port number.
If Set Client is selected for the specified
mode, set the parameters as follows:
l "Opposite IP" indicates the IP address of
the current extended ECC server NE.
l "Port" indicates the number of the port,
which is used for extended ECC, of the
extended ECC server NE.

6.3.5 Querying the ECC Route


You can check whether the ECC route is correct. If the ECC route is incorrect, you need to re-
configure it.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 Choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click Refresh. The ECC routes of the NE are displayed in the NE ECC Link Management
List.

----End

6.3.6 Configuring the DCC Rate


The DCC communication can be performed among NEs. D1–D3, D4–D12, or D1–D12 can be
set for the DCC communication at different rates. Thus, the NM requirements in the case of

6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

complex networking can be met. When configuring DCC, you need to set DCC rate and allocate
DCC resources according to DCC channel types.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Background Information
The OptiX OSN 2000 supports the following three modes.

Table 6-3 DCC channel modes of the OptiX OSN 2000

Running Mode DCC Allocation

Mode 1 (default) 22 D1–D3 channels, four D4–D12 channels, two D1–D12


channels

Mode 2 22 D1–D3 channels, six D4–D12 channels

Mode 3 22 D1–D3 channels, five D1–D12 channels

Precautions

CAUTION
If the query result shows that the DCC resources are in "using" mode when the DCC allocating
mode is modified, delete the channel in DCC Rate Configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab. Click Channel Type to set the DCC rate according to
the actual requirements. Refer to Table 6-4 for the description of the DCC rates.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Close in the dialog box that is displayed.

Step 6 Click the DCC Resource Allocation tab and double-click Number for Allocation to set the
number of DCC channels according to actual requirements. For the DCC channel modes, refer
to Table 6-3.

Step 7 Click Apply and then click OK in the dialog boxes that are displayed.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Parameters

Table 6-4 Parameters for configuring the DCC rate

Paramete Value Range Default Description


r Value

Enabled/ Enabled, Disabled Enabled Specifies whether to enable the DCC


Disabled communication.

Channel D1–D3, D4–D12, D1–D3 Specifies the DCC bytes, that is, the
Type D1–D12 channel rate.

DCC Obtained Already, - Indicates the DCC resource acquisition of


Resources Obtaining Failed a specified optical port at the NE side. This
parameter can be queried only.

Communic Normal, Receiving - Indicates the communication status of a


ation Failed, Transmitting specified optical port. This parameter can
Status Failed, Transmitting/ be queried only.
Receiving Failed

Protocol IP, OSI, HWECC, - Specifies the type of DCC communication.


Type Auto

6.3.7 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission


When the networking involves Huawei equipment and the third-party equipment, the Huawei
equipment can transparently transmit the DCC bytes of the third-party equipment. Huawei
equipment also supports the adjustment of its DCC bytes and transparent transmission over the
idle DCC bytes of the third-party equipment.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Background Information
The transparent transmission of DCC has the following three scenarios:

l The Huawei equipment is located in the center of the network and third-party equipment
as the two ends of the network. The Huawei equipment and the third-party equipment are
managed by separate NM systems basedon bytes D1 to D3. In this case, the Huawei
equipment supports adjusting of the bytes D1 to D3 of the third-party equipment to any
three successive bytes of bytes D4 to D12. The Huawei equipment then transparently
transmits the DCC bytes of third-party equipment.
l The Huawei equipment is located at the two ends of the network and third-party equipment
at the center of the network. The Huawei equipment and the third-party equipment are
managed by separate NM systems basedon bytes D1 to D3. In this case, the Huawei
equipment supports adjusting of its own bytes D1 to D3 to any three successive bytes of

6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

bytes D4 to D12. The OAM data of the Huawei equipment is transparently transmitted by
the third-party equipment.
l Other overhead bytes are transparently transmitted throughspare D bytes. The overhead
bytes include E2, F1, and X1-X4.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC
Transparent Transmission Management tab.
Step 3 Click New and the Create DCC Transparent Transmission Byte dialog box is displayed.
Select the source and sink timeslots, port, and overhead bytes to be transparently transmitted.
For the parameters for configuring the DCC transparent transmission, refer to Table 6-5.

Step 4 Click OK. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Close.

----End

Parameters

Table 6-5 Parameters for configuring the DCC transparent transmission


Parameter Value Range Defaul Description
t Value

Source - - Specifies the source port where the


Timeslot/Port transparent transmission byte is to be set.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Parameter Value Range Defaul Description


t Value

Transparent D1–D12, E2, F1, D1 Specifies the byte to be transmitted


Transmission X1–X4 transparently through the source port.
of Overhead
Byte at Source
Port

Sink Timeslot/ - - Specifies the sink port where the


Port transparent transmission byte is to be set.

Transparent D1–D12, E2, F1, D1 Specifies the byte to be transmitted


Transmission X1–X4 transparently through the sink port.
of Overhead
Byte at Sink
Port

6.4 IP over DCC


The IP over DCC protocol follows the TCP/IP protocol and is applied to control remote NEs
through the Internet.

6.4.1 Basic Concepts


This topic describes the basic concepts of IP over DCC.
6.4.2 Functions and Features
The DCC is used to transmit the OAM data between the SDH equipment. The protocol stacks
used by different vendors are not compatible with each other. Thus, extra overhead bytes or
service resources need to be allocated to transmit DCC data transparently in a network that is
composed of multi-vendor products.
6.4.3 Application
The OptiX OSN 2000 can be connected in various ways in an IP network. Communicating based
on IP, the T2000 accesses NEs through Ethernet. The NEs connect to each other through fibers
or Ethernet ports and can form any type of the networking topologies, such as ring, chain, or
star.
6.4.4 Configuration Requirements
This topic describes the configuration requirements for IP over DCC.

6.4.1 Basic Concepts


This topic describes the basic concepts of IP over DCC.

IP over DCC
The OptiX OSN products support remote operation and maintenance by applying the IP over
DCC protocol. The IP over DCC protocol follows the TCP/IP protocol and is applied to control
remote NEs through the Internet. In the IP over DCC protocol, the D bytes (D1–D3 by default)
of the overhead are used for communication. The OptiX OSN 2000 supports the dynamic and
static routing.

6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

OSPF
The open shortest path first (OSPF) protocol is a dynamic routing protocol based on the link
state. The SDH products update the route table of each NE dynamically by using the OSPF
protocol. The OSPF protocol divides an autonomous domain into different areas so that routes
are updated within an area or between areas. In normal cases, the GNE and all the non-gateway
NEs (non-GNEs) managed by it must be within the same OSPF area.

Remote Access
Gateway NE mode: The ECC protocol is used. For a remote access, log in to the GNE that is
connected to the computer. Then other NEs can be accessed through the NE ID. After the IP
over DCC feature is added, This mode can still be used to access remote NEs.
Direct connection mode: The IP over DCC feature is used, and the remote NE can be connected
directly through the IP address. You only need to enter the destination IP address in the login
interface. For this mode, however, you need to add in advance the static route or default gateway
in the NMS and the NE that needs to be accessed directly.

6.4.2 Functions and Features


The DCC is used to transmit the OAM data between the SDH equipment. The protocol stacks
used by different vendors are not compatible with each other. Thus, extra overhead bytes or
service resources need to be allocated to transmit DCC data transparently in a network that is
composed of multi-vendor products.
IP over DCC meets most of the interworking requirements in the existing network without using
extra overhead or service resources. In this way, the networking structure is simplified, network
resources are saved and other networking requirements can be quickly satisfied.
IP over DCC has the following characteristics:
l Adopts the standard TCP/IP protocol. This makes the OptiX OSN 2000 compatible with
the equipment of other vendors and simplifies the network management.
l Adopts the forwarding function of the third layer in the protocol stack. This requires extra
overhead bytes or service paths.
l Implements flexible networking models.
l Achieves simple upgrade modes and great compatibility. It is easy for IP over DCC to work
with new forwarding or multi-protocol features on the application layer.

6.4.3 Application
The OptiX OSN 2000 can be connected in various ways in an IP network. Communicating based
on IP, the T2000 accesses NEs through Ethernet. The NEs connect to each other through fibers
or Ethernet ports and can form any type of the networking topologies, such as ring, chain, or
star.

Application I GNE Mode


If the T2000 and the GNE connect to the same Ethernet (the T2000 and the GNE need to be in
the same subnet), and other NEs are accessed in the gateway NE mode, you need not add any
static routes.
As shown in Figure 6-4, the T2000 with the IP address of 129.9.0.100 uses NE1 as the GNE to
access other NEs. In This case, you need not add static routes on the T2000 or NEs.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-4 Application Ι

NM T2000
NE4
IP address 129.9.0.100
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 133.168.0.3
255.255.255.0

NE1 NE3
T2000 129.9.0.1 133.168.0.2
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

NE2
NE name
133.168.0.1
IP address
255.255.255.0
Subnet mask

Application II Gateway NE Mode (Default Gateway)


If the T2000 connects to the GNE through a router and other NEs are accessed in the gateway
NE mode, add a default gateway on the T2000 and on the GNE.

As shown in Figure 6-5, the T2000 with the IP address of 10.100.11.12 connects to the GNE
(NE1) through a router and accesses other NEs in the gateway NE mode. In this case, set a default
gateway on both the T2000 and NE1. Set the default gateway on the T2000 to 10.100.11.1, and
that on NE1 to 129.9.0.254.

Figure 6-5 Application II


NM T2000 NE4
IP address 10.100.11.12 133.168.0.3
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 10.100.11.1

10.100.11.1 129.9.0.254 NE1 NE3


255.255.255.0 Router 255.255.255.0 129.9.0.1 133.168.0.2
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
129.9.0.254

NE2
133.168.0.1
255.255.255.0
NE name
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway

Application III Direct Connection Mode (by Static Routes)


If the T2000 and the GNE connect to the same Ethernet and other NEs are accessed in the direct
connection mode, set the default gateway to the IP address of the NE that is connected to the
T2000 directly. Otherwise, add the static route to the non-GNEs, with the forwarding address
as the IP address of the GNE.

As shown in Figure 6-6, if the T2000 with the IP address of 129.9.0.100 needs to access NE3
directly, add the static route to 133.168.0.0/24 on the T2000.

6-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

Figure 6-6 Application III

NM T2000
IP address 129.9.0.100
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 129.9.0.1
Destination:
133.168.0.0
Static routes
Mask:
255.255.255.0 NE4
133.168.0.3
255.255.255.0

T2000 NE1 NE3


129.9.0.1 133.168.0.2
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

NE name
IP address NE2
Subnet mask 133.168.0.1
255.255.255.0
Default gateway
Static routes

Application IV Direct Connection Mode Through a Router (by Static Routes)


The T2000 connects to the Ethernet port of a certain NE through a router and accesses other
NEs in the direct connection mode. Do as follows:
l On the T2000, set the static route to the GNE and non-GNEs.
l On the GNE, set the default route to the T2000.
l Add static routes to the T2000 on the destination station and the intermediate station.

As shown in Figure 6-7, the T2000 with the IP address of 10.100.11.12 connects to NE1 through
a router and accesses NE3 in the direct connection mode. Suppose the IP address of the T2000
is 10.100.11.0 (subnet mask 255.255.255.0). Do as follows:
l Add the static route on the T2000 to the gateway 129.9.0.1.
l Set the default gateway on NE1 to 129.9.0.254.
l Add the static route on NE2 to 10.100.11.0, with the next hop address as 129.9.0.1.
l Add the static route on NE3 to 10.100.11.0, with the next hop address as 133.168.0.1.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-7 Application IV

NE4
133.168.0.3
255.255.255.0

10.100.11.1 129.9.0.254 NE1 NE3


255.255.255.0Router 255.255.255.0
129.9.0.1 133.168.0.2
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
129.9.0.254 Static routes
NM Destination:10.100.11.0
T2000
IP address NE2 Mask: 255.255.255.0
10.100.11.12
133.168.0.1 Next hop:133.168.0.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 10.100.11.1 NE name 255.255.255.0
IP address Static routes
Static routes Subnet mask Destination:10.100.11.0
Destination:129.9.0.1
Default gateway Mask: 255.255.255.0
Mask:255.255.255.0
Next hop:129.9.0.1
Destination:133.168.0.0 Static routes
Mask:255.255.255.0

6.4.4 Configuration Requirements


This topic describes the configuration requirements for IP over DCC.

Network Scale
If NEs communicate with each other through IP over DCC, note the following rules for setting
the network scale:

l To prevent data loss, limit the number of NE nodes in the same OSPF area to 60.
l When using the T2000 to monitor NEs, limit the number of non-GNEs monitored by one
GNE to 60.

IP Address Planning
If NEs communicate with each other through IP over DCC, note the following rules for setting
the IP address:

l If SDH products communicate through IP addresses on the network layer, each NE must
have a unique IP address to prevent routing error due to conflict.
l NEs support standard A, B, C types of IP addresses, that is, the IP address that ranges from
1.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254. The 127.x.x.x, a loopback address, cannot be used.
l The IP address must be used with the subnet mask. The subnet mask must support
consecutive masks in addition to natural masks, for example, 255.255.224.0.
l When the IP over DCC communication is used between a GNE and a non-GNE, the IP
addresses can be of different network sections.
l The NEs that belong to the same OSPF domain can be in different IP subnets.
l Do not configure one GNE and one non-GNE in the same IP subnet.
l The Ethernets in the network must belong to different subnets. Otherwise, a routing error
occurs in the whole network. This is not allowed.
l The subnet masks of the NEs must be the same.
l The priority of static routes is higher than that of dynamic routes. If there is a conflict, static
routes take priority.

6-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

6.5 Configuring IP over DCC Communication


This topic describes how to configure the IP over DCC communication on the T2000.
NOTE

The following parameters are considered as examples. In actual application, configure the parameters
according to the network planning.

6.5.1 Creating a Gateway NE


This topic describes how to create a gateway NE on the T2000.
6.5.2 Setting NE Communication Parameters
This topic describes how to set the NE communication parameters.
6.5.3 Configuring Static Routes
This topic describes how to set the static routes.
6.5.4 Allocating DCC Resources
This topic describes how to allocate the DCC resources.
6.5.5 Querying Communication Status
This topic describes how to query the communication status.
6.5.6 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status
This topic describes how to query the OSPF protocol status.

6.5.1 Creating a Gateway NE


This topic describes how to create a gateway NE on the T2000.

See 2.6.1 Creating a Gateway NE: NE1.

6.5.2 Setting NE Communication Parameters


This topic describes how to set the NE communication parameters.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 Select the NE icon and choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the
Function Tree.

Step 3 Set NE communication parameters such as the IP address, extended ID, and subnet mask,
according to the actual plan. Refer to Table 6-6 for the communication parameters.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Parameters

Table 6-6 Communication parameters

Parameter Value Default Description


Range Value

IP - - Indicates the IP address of an NE. After the


IP address is set manually, any ID address
change does not affect the IP address.

Extended ID 1–254 9 Indicates the higher order 8 bits of a 24-bit


NE ID, also called the subnet number, used to
identify different subnets.

Gateway IP - 0.0.0.0 In the case of the NE that applies the ECC


protocol for communication, the gateway IP
is the IP address of the route that is connected
to the NE. In the case of the NE that applies
the IP over DCC protocol for communication,
the gateway IP is the IP address of the NE that
has the routing function. In the case of the NE
that applies the OSI over DCC protocol for
communication, the gateway IP is similar to
that for the IP over DCC.

Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0 The network mask code of the subnet where
an NE resides, is used to identify the network
segment where an NE resides.

NSAP 26 4700040006 The NSAP address consists of the domain


Address hexadecimal 0001 address and NE SYSID. The domain address
numbers is editable, which can be 26 hexadecimal
digits at most.

6.5.3 Configuring Static Routes


This topic describes how to set the static routes.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 Select the NE icon and choose Communication > IP Stack Protocol Management from the
Function Tree.

Step 3 Click the IP Route Management tab.

6-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

Step 4 Click New. Then, the Create an IP Route dialog box is displayed. Set the following parameters
in the interface:
l Destination Address: 192.168.0.0
l Gateway IP: 10.100.11.0
l Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

6.5.4 Allocating DCC Resources


This topic describes how to allocate the DCC resources.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
If the query result shows that the DCC resources are in use when the DCC allocating mode is
changed, delete the channel from DCC Rate Configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 Select the NE icon and choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click the DCC Resource Allocation tab and double-click Number for Allocation to set the
number of DCC channels according to actual requirements. For the DCC channel modes, refer
to Table 6-3.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

6.5.5 Querying Communication Status


This topic describes how to query the communication status.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
Step 2 Select the NE icon and choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Step 4 Click Query. Then, the communication status is displayed.

----End

6.5.6 Querying the OSPF Protocol Status


This topic describes how to query the OSPF protocol status.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
Step 2 Select the NE icon and choose Communication > IP Stack Protocol Management from the
Function Tree.
Step 3 Click the OSPF Parameter Setting tab.
Step 4 Click Query. Check whether the OSPF protocol is normal.

----End

6.6 OSI over DCC


The OSI over DCC protocol is used for communication in case of hybrid networking of the
Huawei equipment and the third-party equipment that support the OSI over DCC
communication.

6.6.1 Basic Concepts


This topic describes the basic concepts related to OSI over DCC.
6.6.2 Functions and Features
When products of different vendors are used to create a transmission network, the OSI over DCC
protocol is used for communication. It can eliminate the limits for such hybrid networking. The

6-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

management information is transparently transmitted at the network layer. Thus, the networking
becomes more flexible.
6.6.3 Application
According to different network situations, OSI over DCC has two major applications.

6.6.1 Basic Concepts


This topic describes the basic concepts related to OSI over DCC.

NSAP
The OSI protocol takes the NSAP address as the protocol identification for nodes. The NSAP
address is of the format as shown in the following figure.

Figure 6-8 Format of a simple NSAP address

AREA ID SYS ID NSEL

One to 13 bytes Six bytes One byte

AREA ID: The length is adjustable from 1 to 13 bytes. The AREA ID is used for L2 routing
addressing within a domain. The values must be the same in the L1 route domain and be different
in the L2 route domain.
SYS ID: The length is fixed to six bytes. The SYS ID is used for route addressing within a
domain. For Huawei SDH optical equipment, the former three bytes are fixed to 0x08003E and
the latter three bytes are the same with the NE ID.
NSEL: The NSNL value is fixed to 0x1D.
The AREA ID of Huawei optical equipment is 47000400060001.
The ISO8348/AD2 defines a complicated format of the NSAP address. This manual does not
cover the naming details and functions of each character in the NSAP address format. In the
case of the OSI protocol, only the simple NSAP address format needs to be noticed.

Figure 6-9 Format of a complicated NSAP address

IDP DSP

High order DSP

AFI IDI+pad DFI ORG RES RD Area

Area address System ID NSEL

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

The Huawei equipment uses the simple NSAP address format. This does not affect the
interconnection between Huawei equipment and third-party equipment. The configuration of
the NSAP address requires that the AREA IDs in the same domain should be the same. The
NSAP address of the third-party equipment is configured as follows:
l AFI: 47

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

l IDI: 0005
l DFI: 80
l ORG: 000000
l RES: 0000
l RD: 0001
l AREA: 0001
l SYS ID: 00206005FA68
l NSEL: 1D

When a networking involves Huawei equipment and the third-party equipment within the same
domain, set the AREA ID to 4700058000000000000001 0001.

TP4
The TP4 protocol exists at the transport layer of the OSI protocol stake. The TP4 protocol is
applied to create a reliable communication connection. The TP4 protocol can handle the
problems such as data packet loss, repetition and falsification, which are caused by network
faults.

6.6.2 Functions and Features


When products of different vendors are used to create a transmission network, the OSI over DCC
protocol is used for communication. It can eliminate the limits for such hybrid networking. The
management information is transparently transmitted at the network layer. Thus, the networking
becomes more flexible.
The client need not create extra DCN channels. The current DCC resources then can be used to
realize central management over equipment from several vendors.
The OSI protocol supports three types of network nodes: end system (ES), level 1 intermediate
systems (L1-IS), and level 2 intermediate systems (L2-IS).

6.6.3 Application
According to different network situations, OSI over DCC has two major applications.

Application Ι Third-Party Equipment Forwarding OAM Data of Huawei


Equipment
In this networking mode, the Huawei equipment is located at the edge of the network and the
third-party equipment is located at the core. The third-party equipment forwards the NM data
between Huawei equipment and the T2000. In this case, at least one GNE must be configured
in the subnet of the Huawei equipment.

6-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

Figure 6-10 Huawei equipment at the edge of the network


EMS of third-party
Huawei T2000 equipment

ES

OSI LAN

OSI DCN

Layer 2 routing
area

GNE

Legacy network

GNE

New network Third-party equipment

Huawei equipment

Application II Huawei Equipment Forwarding OAM data of Third-Party


Equipment
In this networking mode, the Huawei equipment is located at the core of the network while the
third-party equipment at the edge. The Huawei equipment forwards the NM data between the
NMS and third-party equipment.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Figure 6-11 Huawei equipment at the core of the network


EMS of third-party
Huawei T2000 equipment

ES

OSI LAN

OSI DCN

Layer 2 routing
area

GNE

New network

GNE
Legacy network
Third-party equipment

Huawei equipment

6.7 Configuring the OSI over DCC Communication


The OSI protocol is a communication protocol. It is widely used in the SDH management
network. The OSI over DCC protocol is applied to eliminate the limit of the hybrid networking.
The NM data can then be transparently transmitted at the network layer. Hence, the Huawei
equipment can interconnect with the third-party equipment that supports the OSI protocol.

CAUTION
Regardless of the operating system, Window or Solaris, the PC does not support the OSI protocol.
If the NMS installed at the PC side needs to use the OSI protocol to manage NEs, install the
corresponding protocol software at the PC side.

6-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

NOTE

The following parameters are provided as examples only. In actual application, configure the parameters
according to the network planning.

6.7.1 Creating a Gateway NE


This topic describes how to create a gateway NE on the T2000.
6.7.2 Setting the NE ID
This topic describes how to set the NE ID.
6.7.3 Setting NE Communication Parameter
This topic describes how to set the NE communication parameters.
6.7.4 Setting the NSAP Address for an NE
This topic describes how to set the NSAP address of a GNE. Do as follows to modify the NSAP
address of a GNE.
6.7.5 Configuring the Node Type for an NE
You can set the node type to ES, L1, or L2 for an NE according to the network plan. To facilitate
the network expansion, do not set the NE to the ES type.
6.7.6 Configuring Optical Port Protocol Stake and LAPD Role
The default protocol stake that is started at the optical port varies with products. If the current
protocol stake started at the optical port does not match with that in the network planning, do as
follows to set the protocol stake on the T2000: Select the optical port, delete the current
configuration, and then add the required protocol stake.
6.7.7 Querying Route Information
After the previous configuration is complete, connect the fibers correctly. Use the NMS to query
if the route information of each node is normal. If yes, the nodes can communicate with each
other. If not, perform careful check to ensure the configuration is correct.
6.7.8 Creating an OSI GNE
After the configuration of the NSAP address is complete, use the TP4 connection scheme to
create an OSI GNE.

6.7.1 Creating a Gateway NE


This topic describes how to create a gateway NE on the T2000.

See 2.6.1 Creating a Gateway NE: NE1.

6.7.2 Setting the NE ID


This topic describes how to set the NE ID.

See 6.3.3 Setting the NE ID.

6.7.3 Setting NE Communication Parameter


This topic describes how to set the NE communication parameters.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 Select the NE icon and choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the
Function Tree.

Step 3 Set the NSAP address for the NE according to the actual application. The following figure is for
reference only.

Step 4 Click Apply.

----End

6.7.4 Setting the NSAP Address for an NE


This topic describes how to set the NSAP address of a GNE. Do as follows to modify the NSAP
address of a GNE.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > DCN Management from the Main Menu. Click the GNE tab.

Step 2 Right-click the Gateway NE icon and then select Modify GNE.

6-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

Step 3 In the displayed Modify GNE dialog box, set the NSAP address according to actual application.
The following NSAP address is provided as an example. Refer to Table 6-7 for the parameters
for GNE attributes.
l Gateway Type: OSI Gateway
l NSAP Address: 4700040006000108003E09004B1D

Step 4 Click OK. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Close.

----End

Parameters

Table 6-7 Parameters for configuring the GNE attributes

Parameter Value Default Description


Range Value

GNE Name - GNE name Indicates the GNE Name.

Gateway IP IP indicates the type of the GNE.


Type Gateway, Gateway
OSI
Gateway

NSAP - - An NSAP address with the maximum length is


Address 20-byte hexadecimal numbers. The format of the
NSAP address is "domain address + 08003e + NE
ID + NSEL". The maximum length of the domain
address is 13 bytes, which is entered by the user.
NSEL is the port number for the network-layer
protocol. The NSEL is fixed to 1d, which is of
one byte.

TSAP 8888 8888 Indicates the port number of the OSI protocol,
which cannot be modified.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

6.7.5 Configuring the Node Type for an NE


You can set the node type to ES, L1, or L2 for an NE according to the network plan. To facilitate
the network expansion, do not set the NE to the ES type.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
The configuration of the NE type takes effect only after the NE is reset. Resetting the NE may
interrupt the services.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the Network
Layer Parameters tab. Refer to Table 6-8 for the parameters at the network layer.
Step 3 Double-click Configuration Role and select a node type from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Click Apply.


Step 5 Click OK in the displayed Confirm dialog box. In the Operation Result dialog box displayed,
click Close.

----End

6-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

Parameters

Table 6-8 Network-layer parameters


Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Configuration ES, L1, L2 L1 Specifies the role of an NE in OSI


Role communications. ES indicates "do
not handle the IS protocol". L1
indicates "send route information in
the area". L2 indicates "send route
information between areas".

Current Role ES, L1, L2 L1 Specifies the current role of an NE


in OSI communications.

6.7.6 Configuring Optical Port Protocol Stake and LAPD Role


The default protocol stake that is started at the optical port varies with products. If the current
protocol stake started at the optical port does not match with that in the network planning, do as
follows to set the protocol stake on the T2000: Select the optical port, delete the current
configuration, and then add the required protocol stake.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Step 2 Click Query. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
Step 3 Select the optical port that needs to be configured with the protocol stake. Click Delete to delete
the current configuration. The Prompt dialog box is displayed. Click Yes. Click Close in the
dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Click New and then the Create dialog box is displayed. Set each parameter in the dialog box
according to actual planning. Refer to Table 6-9 for the parameters for the configuration of the
protocol stake and LAPD role of optical ports.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

Step 5 Click OK. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Close.

----End

Parameters
When operating the OSI protocol stack at the port, the LAPD role of the NEs at all ports is
network by default. You need to set the LAPD role at each port according to the networking
plan.

Table 6-9 Parameters for setting the optical port protocol and LAPD role
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Channel Type D1–D3, D4– D1–D3 Specifies the channel-occupied


D12, D1–D12 bytes, that is, the channel rate.

Protocol Type IP, OSI, IP Specifies the protocol type of DCC


HWECC, Auto communication.

LAPD Role User, Network Network The LAPD may be either User or
Network. In the case of two optical
ports that are connected by a fiber,
the LAPD roles must be different.
Follow this rule in the case of
networking exclusively of Huawei
equipment and hybrid networking
of Huawei equipment and third-
party equipment.

6-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the DCN

6.7.7 Querying Route Information


After the previous configuration is complete, connect the fibers correctly. Use the NMS to query
if the route information of each node is normal. If yes, the nodes can communicate with each
other. If not, perform careful check to ensure the configuration is correct.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l After the previous configurations are complete, connect the fibers according to the actual
situation.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree. Click the Routing Table tab. Click Refresh.
Step 2 Check if the information in Link Adjacency Table is correct.
Step 3 Click the L1 Routing tab and the L2 Routing tab respectively to check if the route information
is correct.

----End

6.7.8 Creating an OSI GNE


After the configuration of the NSAP address is complete, use the TP4 connection scheme to
create an OSI GNE.

Prerequisite
l You must log in to the T2000, and the T2000 must be connected to the equipment correctly.
l After the previous configurations are complete, connect the fibers according to the actual
situation.
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the Main Topology and choose New > Device. Set the NE type to OSN Series
> OptiX OSN 2000.
Step 2 Enter the NE attributes according to the IP address allocation diagram:
l ID: 24
l Extended ID: 9
l Name: NE1
l Gateway Type: Gateway
l Protocol: OSI
l NASP Address: 47000400060001 08003e0900181d
l NE User: root (default)

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
6 Configuring the DCN Configuration Guide

l Password: password
l Clear the NE Preconfiguration check box.

NOTE

An NSAP address with the maximum length is 20-byte hexadecimal numbers. The format of the NSAP
address is "domain address + 08003e + NE ID + NSEL". The maximum length of the domain address is
13 bytes, which is entered by the user. NSEL is the port number for the network-layer protocol. The NSEL
is fixed to 1d, which is of one byte.

Step 3 Click OK.

Step 4 Click on the Main Topology, and the icon of NE1 is displayed. There are and above the
NE1 icon, indicates gateway and indicates that the NE is not configured.
NOTE

The NE user root is the default NE user set for the NMS. The default password is password.

----End

6-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring the STP or RSTP

7 Configuring the STP or RSTP

About This Chapter

This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the STP or RSTP on the T2000.
7.1 Overview
This topic describes the background for the generation of the STP or RSTP, basic knowledge
about the STP or RSTP, and STP/RSTP port state transition.
7.2 Engineering Requirements
Company F has three branches located in NE1, NE2, and NE3. The data must be shared between
the branches. Any two branches must be able to visit each other. The three branches must share
a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth dynamically. The Ethernet equipment of company F provides 100 Mbit/
s Ethernet ports. The RSTP must be enabled.
7.3 Engineering Planning
Based on the requirements, the engineering design department conducts planning and outputs
the engineering information.
7.4 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the RSTP/STP services on the T2000. The spanning tree
blocks certain ports to prevent the loop and thus to solve loop problems.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
7 Configuring the STP or RSTP Configuration Guide

7.1 Overview
This topic describes the background for the generation of the STP or RSTP, basic knowledge
about the STP or RSTP, and STP/RSTP port state transition.
7.1.1 Background for the Generation of the STP or RSTP
Normally, the topology for the Layer 2 switching network involves a loop. The loop may cause
the broadcast storm and MAC address table flapping.
7.1.2 Basic Knowledge about the STP or RSTP
The spanning tree protocol (STP) blocks certain ports to prevent a loop. The rapid spanning tree
protocol (RSTP) realizes all the functions of the STP. The RSTP is modified and developed
based on the STP. In the case of the RSTP, the convergence speed in the network is faster. When
a link fails, the congested ports can be enabled quickly to restore the services.
7.1.3 STP/RSTP Port State Transition
An STP port may be in the enabled or disabled state. The enabled status is further classified into
the following states: blocking, listening, learning, and forwarding.

7.1.1 Background for the Generation of the STP or RSTP


Normally, the topology for the Layer 2 switching network involves a loop. The loop may cause
the broadcast storm and MAC address table flapping.
The problems are described as follows:
l Broadcast storm: The broadcast packets are duplicated and forwarded cyclically on the loop
until all the network bandwidth is exhausted. As a result, normal services and
communication equipment are heavily impacted. Even in the case of unicast packets, before
the equipment learns the destination MAC addresses, the unicast packets are broadcast, and
as a result, a broadcast storm may be caused.
l MAC address table flapping: In the case of a broadcast storm, a large number of packets
with the same source MAC address are broadcast to the loop, and then reach different ports
of the equipment on the opposite side. These ports then learn and replace the source MAC
address repeatedly. This is called MAC address table flapping. As many equipment
resources are used for the address learning, more load is placed on the equipment.

7.1.2 Basic Knowledge about the STP or RSTP


The spanning tree protocol (STP) blocks certain ports to prevent a loop. The rapid spanning tree
protocol (RSTP) realizes all the functions of the STP. The RSTP is modified and developed
based on the STP. In the case of the RSTP, the convergence speed in the network is faster. When
a link fails, the congested ports can be enabled quickly to restore the services.
The basic principle of the STP is as follows: Bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) are transmitted
between bridges to determine the topological structure of the network.
l Configuration BPDU (CBPDU)
l Topology change notification (TCN) BPDU

The RSTP specifications are described in IEEE 802.1W and IEEE 802.1D (2003). The RSTP is
developed based on the STP. Detailed modifications and supplements are made on the STP. The
RSTP shortens the time delay between congestion and forwarding at the ports, restores the
network connectivity rapidly, and provides better services if a temporary loop is not caused.

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring the STP or RSTP

This is different from the STP. The protocol packets transmitted between the bridges that start
the RSTP are the RSTP data unit, namely, RST PDU.
The RSTP is compatible with the STP. When the RSTP is mixed with the STP, advantages of
the RSTP such as rapid convergence are unavailable.
The EMS1 board of the OptiX OSN 2000 supports both the STP and the RSTP. By default, the
RSTP is supported.

7.1.3 STP/RSTP Port State Transition


An STP port may be in the enabled or disabled state. The enabled status is further classified into
the following states: blocking, listening, learning, and forwarding.
Figure 7-1 shows the state transition of the STP port.

Figure 7-1 STP port state transition


Disabled

Listening

Disabled Blocking Learning Disabled

Forwarding
Enabled

Disabled

l Disabled: The port that is in the disabled state is not involved in the topology and does not
forward any packets. Any of the enabled states can change to this state. The disabled state
must change to the Blocking state to enter the Enabled state. The spanning tree cannot
control the disabled state because the port in the disabled state is not involved in the
topology. The disabled state can only be controlled by the management function.
l Blocking: The port in the Blocking state is involved in the topology but does not forward
any packets.
l Listening: The port in the listening state is involved in the topology, and can forward the
BPDU and discard packets. The Listening state is a temporary state in the process of
topology generation or change.
l Learning: The port in the learning state is involved in the topology and can forward the
BPDU and discard packets. The Learning state is a temporary state in the process of
topology generation or change.
l Forwarding: The port in the forwarding state is involved in the topology and can forward
packets and the BPDU.
Control the port state to make certain ports finally change into the forwarding or blocking state.
Disconnect at least one port from a loop to prevent the loop. This is the ultimate goal of the STP
algorithm.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
7 Configuring the STP or RSTP Configuration Guide

In the case of the STP, the convergence time is relatively long and the ports play unclear roles.
In this case, the RSTP is widely used. In addition, the RSTP is compatible with the STP. In
comparison with the STP, the RSTP has the following improvements:
l Ports play clear roles through configuration.
l A more active handshake mechanism is applied to decrease the port status to three types:
– Forwarding
– Learning
– Discarding
l The Discarding state in the RSTP corresponds to the Listening and Blocking states in the
STP.
l Rapid convergence

7.2 Engineering Requirements


Company F has three branches located in NE1, NE2, and NE3. The data must be shared between
the branches. Any two branches must be able to visit each other. The three branches must share
a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth dynamically. The Ethernet equipment of company F provides 100 Mbit/
s Ethernet ports. The RSTP must be enabled.

7.3 Engineering Planning


Based on the requirements, the engineering design department conducts planning and outputs
the engineering information.

7.3.1 Networking Diagram


Determine the networking diagram according to the engineering requirements.
7.3.2 Board Information of Each NE
Ethernet boards need to be added to the NE based on the type and volume of the service.
7.3.3 Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE
This topic describes the service configuration of each NE based on the engineering plan.

7.3.1 Networking Diagram


Determine the networking diagram according to the engineering requirements.
Figure 7-2 shows the Ethernet service networking and port allocation.

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring the STP or RSTP

Figure 7-2 Ethernet service networking and port allocation

VCTRUNK1 VB VCTRUNK2

PORT2
NE1
T2000

B
PORT2 NE3 PORT2
VCTRUNK1 VB VCTRUNK2

PORT2
F1 NE2
F3

PORT2 VCTRUNK

VCTRUNK1 VB VCTRUNK2
F2
PORT2

7.3.2 Board Information of Each NE


Ethernet boards need to be added to the NE based on the type and volume of the service.
One EMS1 board is added to NE1, NE2, and NE3. Figure 7-3 shows the board information of
NE1, NE2, and NE3.

Figure 7-3 Board layout of NE1, NE2, and NE3

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 14 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

S
C PIU
T P X X E C E A

A T C C M T U

1 1 S S S F X

4 4 1 PIU S

A A 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 13 15 16 17 18
(IU1) (IU2) (IU3) (SU1) (SU2) (SU3) (XCS) (XCS) (SU4) (SU5) (SU6) (SCC) (PIU) (IU4) (IU5) (AUX)

7.3.3 Service Configuration Diagram of Each NE


This topic describes the service configuration of each NE based on the engineering plan.
Figure 7-4 shows the service configuration diagram of NE1, NE2, and NE3.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
7 Configuring the STP or RSTP Configuration Guide

Figure 7-4 Service configuration diagram

F1

10 Mbit/s

NE1
PORT2
PORT

LP1

VB1
VCTRUNK

LP2

LP3

VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC12-10


VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5

VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK PORT
PORT VCTRUNK

LP2
LP2 F3
VCTRUNK1 LP1 PORT2
PORT2 LP1
VCTRUNK1
F2 VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5
VC4-1: VC12-1 to VC12-5
LP3
LP3
10 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
VB1 VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC12-10 VC4-1: VC12-6 to VC12-10
VB1
NE3
NE2

Table 7-1 provides the information of the Ethernet service connection between NE2 and NE1/
NE3. Table 7-2 provides the information of the Ethernet service connection between NE1 and
NE3.

Table 7-1 Ethernet service connection table 1


Item F

NE NE2

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK port type PE PE

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access

PORT VLAN ID 11 (set according to the requirement of the client)

VB VB1

Mounted port PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

NE NE1 NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5 VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring the STP or RSTP

Item F

VCTRUNCK port type PE PE

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access Access

PORT VLAN ID 11 11

VB VB1 VB1

Mounted port PORT2, VCTRUNK1 PORT2, VCTRUNK2

Table 7-2 Ethernet service connection table 2

Item F

NE NE3

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-2

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-1–VC12-5

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNCK port type PE

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access

PORT VLAN ID 11 (set according to the requirement of the client)

VB VB1

Mounted port PORT2, VCTRUNK1

NE NE1

Slot-board-port 9-EMS1-1

Timeslot VC4-1: VC12-6–VC12-10

VCTRUNK VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNCK port type PE

Working mode of PORT Auto-negotiation

Tag flag of PORT Access

PORT VLAN ID 11

VB VB1

Mounted port PORT2, VCTRUNK2

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
7 Configuring the STP or RSTP Configuration Guide

Table 7-3 is the forwarding filtering table of NE1, NE2, and NE3.

Table 7-3 Forwarding filtering table

NE VB VLAN ID Forwarding Port

NE1 VB1 11 PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

NE2 VB1 11 PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

NE3 VB1 11 PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

In this example, the bridge of NE1 is assumed as the root bridge. Table 7-4 lists the bridge
priority of NE1, NE2, and NE3.

Table 7-4 Bridge priority table

Bridge Priority

NE1-VB1 4096

NE2-VB1 8192

NE3-VB1 12288

7.4 Configuration Process


This topic describes how to configure the RSTP/STP services on the T2000. The spanning tree
blocks certain ports to prevent the loop and thus to solve loop problems.

Table 7-5 provides the process of configuring the STP/RSTP service on the T2000.

Table 7-5 Process of configuring the STP/RSTP

Proc Operation Remarks


edur
e

1 Creating a board Required

2 Configuring Ethernet ports Required

3 Configuring bound paths Required

4 Creating the Ethernet LAN service Required

5 Configuring a forwarding filtering Required


table

6 Configuring the CAR This operation is optional. See 4.5.4


Configuring the Data of NE2.

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring the STP or RSTP

Proc Operation Remarks


edur
e

7 Configuring a cross-connection This operation is required. See 4.5.4


from the Ethernet board to the Configuring the Data of NE2.
SDH line board

8 Configuring the STP/RSTP Required

NOTE

Refer to the T2000 Help for the meaning of each parameter when you configure a service.

7.4.1 Creating a Board


This topic describes how to create the Ethernet boards on the T2000.
7.4.2 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of NE1
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the Ethernet ports of NE1.
7.4.3 Configuring the Bound Paths of NE1
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the bound paths of NE1.
7.4.4 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service of NE1
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the Ethernet LAN service of NE1.
7.4.5 Configuring the VLAN Forwarding Filtering Table
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the VLAN forwarding filtering table
of NE1.
7.4.6 Configuring Cross-Connections from Ethernet boards to SDH Line Boards on NE1
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet
boards to the SDH line boards on NE1.
7.4.7 Configuring the Data of NE2 and NE3
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2 and NE3.
7.4.8 Configuring the STP/RSTP
This topic uses an example to describe how to enable the STP/RSTP.
7.4.9 Querying STP/RSTP Running Information
This topic uses an example to describe how to query the running information of the STP/RSTP.

7.4.1 Creating a Board


This topic describes how to create the Ethernet boards on the T2000.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet board must be installed on the equipment.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
7 Configuring the STP or RSTP Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, double-click the NE1 icon. Then, the NE panel is displayed.

Step 2 Right-click slot 9 according to the board layout shown in Figure 7-3, and select EMS1 from the
displayed boards.

Step 3 Make sure that the EMS1 board is configured in slot 9 and that the ETFS8 board is configured
in slot 16. Click to exit the NE panel diagram.

Step 4 Refer to Steps 1–3 to create the Ethernet boards of NE2 and NE3. Figure 7-3 shows the board
layout of NE2 and NE3.

----End

7.4.2 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the Ethernet ports of NE1.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet board must be installed on the equipment.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
This configuration is invalid for internal ports (VCTRUNK ports). Hence, retain the default
configuration (auto-negotiation) for VCTRUNK ports.
Configure external ports according to the actual port status.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.

Step 2 Select 9-EMS1 from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface. Click .

Step 3 Select External Port and perform the following settings:


1. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Enabled/Disabled of PORT2 to Enabled.
2. Click Apply.
3. Click the TAG Attributes tab. Set TAG of PORT2 to Access and Default VALN ID of
PORT2 to 11. For other parameters, the default values are used.
4. Click Apply.

Step 4 Select Internal Port, and click the Advanced Attributes tab. Set Point to Point Attributes of
VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 to Adaptive connection.

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring the STP or RSTP

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

Parameters
Table 7-6, Table 4-12, and Table 7-7 list the configuration parameters for Ethernet ports.

Table 7-6 Parameters for setting the basic attributes of Ethernet ports

Parameter Value Range Defaul Description


t Value

Enabled/ Enabled, Disabled Disable Specifies the enabled or disabled state of


Disabled d the port. "Enabled" means that this port is
allowed to access the services. "Disabled"
means that this port is not allowed to access
the services.

Working Auto-Negotiation, Auto- The auto-negotiation mode is


Mode 10M Half-Duplex, Negotia recommended, because it can
10M Full-Duplex, tion automatically detect the best working
100M Half-Duplex, mode to combine a port and its
100M Full-Duplex, interconnected port. Hence it facilitates
1000M Half- maintenance. During configuration, make
Duplex, 1000M sure that the working modes of the
Full-Duplex connected ports are the same. If the
working modes are different, the services
are unavailable.

Maximum 1518–65535 1522 It is also called the maximum transmitted


Frame unit (MTU).
Length

MAC Non-Loopback, Non- Specifies the loopback state at the MAC


Loopback Inloop, Outloop Loopba layer.
ck

PHY Non-Loopback, Non- Specifies the loopback state at the PHY


Loopback Inloop, Outloop Loopba layer.
ck

Table 7-7 Point-to-point attributes

Point-to-Point Application Port Attribute


Attribute

Link connection The port is forced to be a point- Full duplex


to-point link connection.

Shared media The port is forced to connect to Half duplex


the shared media.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
7 Configuring the STP or RSTP Configuration Guide

Point-to-Point Application Port Attribute


Attribute

Adaptive connection The connection is adaptive by Auto-negotiation


default.

7.4.3 Configuring the Bound Paths of NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the bound paths of NE1.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet board must be installed on the equipment.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Internal Port page, click the Bound Path tab.
Step 2 Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 To configure the bound paths of VCTRUNK1, set the parameters in the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK1
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Available Timeslots: VC12-1 to VC12-5. Click .

Step 4 To configure the bound paths of VCTRUNK2, set the parameters in the dialog box as follows:
l Configurable Ports: VCTRUNK2
l Level: VC12-xv
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Available Resources: VC4-1

l Available Timeslots: VC12-6 to VC12-10. Click .

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

7.4.4 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service of NE1


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the Ethernet LAN service of NE1.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet board must be installed on the equipment.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring the STP or RSTP

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click New and the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set VB Name to VB1.

Step 4 Click Configure Mounted Port and the VB Mount Port Configuration dialog box is
displayed.

Step 5 Set as follows in the dialog box according to the service configuration diagram of NE1:

l Set VB Mount Port to PORT2, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Then, click .


l Click OK.

Step 6 For other parameters, the default values are used. Click OK in the Create Ethernet LAN
Service dialog box.

----End

Parameters
Table 7-8 lists the configuration parameters for the EPLAN service.

Table 7-8 Parameters for configuring the Ethernet LAN service

Parameter Value Range Defau Description


lt
Value

VB Name A maximum of sixteen - Specifies the VB name.


English characters

Mounted Port - - The mount port may be the MAC port


or the VCTRUNK port.

VLAN ID 1–4095 - Specifies the VLAN ID. Configures


the forwarding filtering table

Selected - - Specifies the physical port for


Forwarding forwarding the data.
Port

7.4.5 Configuring the VLAN Forwarding Filtering Table


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the VLAN forwarding filtering table
of NE1.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet board must be installed on the equipment.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
7 Configuring the STP or RSTP Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Click the VLAN tab.

Step 2 Click Create and the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the following parameters in the Create VLAN dialog box:
l VB: 1-VB1
l VLAN ID: 11
l Selected forwarding ports: PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

7.4.6 Configuring Cross-Connections from Ethernet boards to SDH


Line Boards on NE1
This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet
boards to the SDH line boards on NE1.

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet board must be installed on the equipment.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-10-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring the STP or RSTP

Procedure
Step 1 Select NE1 from the Object Tree.

Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Click Create, and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set the following parameters in the dialog box:


l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Sink Slot: 27-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 1–5
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 Refer to Step 4 and set the following parameters in the dialog box:
l Level: VC12
l Direction: Bidirectional
l Source Slot: 9-EMS1-1(SDH-1)
l Source VC4: VC4-1
l Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 6–10
l Sink Slot: 28-OSB4A-1(SDH-1)
l Sink VC4: VC4-2.
l Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3–6): 6–10
l Activate Immediately: Yes

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

7.4.7 Configuring the Data of NE2 and NE3


This topic uses an example to describe how to configure the data of NE2 and NE3.

NOTE

The method of configuring the data of NE2 and NE3 is the same as the method of configuring the data of
NE1, except that the parameter settings are different. For the configuration process, see 7.4.6 Configuring
Cross-Connections from Ethernet boards to SDH Line Boards on NE1.

7.4.8 Configuring the STP/RSTP


This topic uses an example to describe how to enable the STP/RSTP.

Issue 02 (2008-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2000 Enhanced STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Multi-
Service Optical Transmission System
7 Configuring the STP or RSTP Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l The Ethernet board must be installed on the equipment.
l The Ethernet Layer 2 switching services must be created before you enable the RSTP
protocol.